All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that
our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions
and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,
you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific
vehicle.
A3NO-EE28I
OWNER'S
MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
F2
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-
formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-
lished by the Department of Transportation and other government agencies in your country.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-
tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
✽
NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
F4
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive
Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very
proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-
fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai deal-
er. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the man-
ual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
Copyright 2012 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet
Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page
8-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
F5
A000A01A-GAT
This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.
OWNER'S I.D.
ORIGINAL: NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:
DATE OF SALE:
SUBSEQUENT: NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:
TRANSFER DATE:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
table of contents
1
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-2
Vehicle break-in process / 1-4
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-5
Introduction
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehi-
cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under vari-
ous road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is pro-
vided in the Table of Contents. A good
place to start is the index; it has an alpha-
betical listing of all information in your
manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manu-
al. These WARNINGs were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.You should
carefully read and follow ALL procedures
and recommendations provided in these
WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.
✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-
ful information is being provided.
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance, we
recommend you to use unleaded gaso-
line which complies with EN 228 and has
an octane rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock
Index) 91 or higher.
You may use unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of RON 91~94/AKI 87~90
but it may result in slight performance
reduction of the vehicle.
Except Europe
Your new HYUNDAI vehicle is designed
to use only unleaded fuel having an
Octane Rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) 87 or higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-
sions and spark plug fouling.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
13
Introduction
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems
may not be covered by the manufactur-
er’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
Leaded (if equipped)
For some countries, your vehicle is
designed to use leaded gasoline. When
you are going to use leaded gasoline,
ask to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
whether leaded gasoline in your vehicle
is available or not.
Octane Rating of leaded gasoline is
same with unleaded one.
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control sys-
tem’s oxygen sensor and affect
emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.)
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
Introduction
41
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content
2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapor lock or hard starting.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-
formance and damage components of
the fuel system.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasoline that meets Europe
Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents.
For customers who do not use good
quality gasoline including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting or
the engine does not run smoothly, one
bottle of additives added to the fuel tank
at every 15,000km (for Europe)/5,000km
(except Europe). Additives are available
from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use
them.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding reg-
istration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-
able.
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-
cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-
erly.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3
minutes at one time.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000
km (1,200 miles) of operation.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance prob-
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
15
Introduction
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Seat belt warning light
High beam indicator
Turn signal indicator
ABS warning light
Parking brake & Brake fluid
warning light
Engine oil pressure warning
light
ESP indicator
ESP OFF indicator
Malfunction indicator light
Air bag warning light
Cruise indicator (if equipped)
Cruise SET indicator
(if equipped)
Immobilizer indicator
Low fuel level warning light
* For more detailed explanations, refer to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.
Charging system warning light
Low windshield washer fluid
level warning light
Door ajar warning light
Overspeed warning light
(if equipped)
120
km/h
AFLS malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
ECS malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
Tail light indicator
Trunk ajar warning light
Front fog light indicator
AFLS
ECS
EPB malfunction indicator
AUTO HOLD indicator
EPB
VSM OFF indicator (if equipped)
VSM
OFF
AUTO
HOLD
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System) malfunction
indicator (if equipped)
Low tire pressure telltale
(if equipped)
ECO-P indicator (if equipped)
ECO-P
SPORT mode indicator
(if equipped)
SPORT
LDWS indicator (if equipped)
LDWS
LED headlamp (low beam) mal-
function indicator (if equipped)
Introduction
61
SCC malfunction
indicator
(if equipped)
SCC sensor mal-
function indicator
(if equipped)
Door open posi-
tion indicator
Low tire pressure
position indicator
(if equipped)
Lane departure
warning system
malfunction indica-
tor (if equipped)
ECO indicator
(if equipped)
Pre-safe seat belt
warning light
(if equipped)
OVI049222
OVI049221
OVI049220L
OVI069003L
OVI059016L
OVI052091
OVI052090
2
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-3
Engine compartment / 2-4
Your vehicle at a glance
Your vehicle at a glance
22
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-12
2. Outside rearview mirror control
switch................................................4-45
3. Power window switches ....................4-24
4. Fuel filler lid release button...............4-30
5. Hood release lever............................4-28
6. Brake pedal.......................................5-14
7. Accelerator pedal ...............................5-6
8. Auto hold control button....................5-19
9. Trunk lid release switch or power
trunk main control switch* .......4-16, 4-18
10. Electric parking brake .....................5-15
11. Instrument panel illumination
control knob ....................................4-48
12. Parking assist button* .....................4-72
13. Front blind spot monitoring system
ON button* ......................................4-79
14. Rear fog light switch* ......................4-86
15. Rear curtain folding button* ..........4-124
16. ESP OFF button .............................5-23
17. ECO-P (Pedal) button*....................5-49
18. VSM OFF button*............................5-50
19. Light control/Turn signals ................4-82
20. Steering wheel tilt control ...............4-40
21. Steering wheel ................................4-39
* : if equipped
OVI012001L
* The actual vehicle may differ from the illustration.
23
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Instrument cluster.............................4-47
2. Horn .................................................4-41
3. Driver’s front air bag.........................3-51
4. Wiper/Washer...................................4-88
5. Engine start/stop button .....................5-4
6. Hazard warning flasher
switch ........................................4-80, 6-2
7. Climate control system.....................4-96
8. Clock ..............................................4-121
9. Shift lever ...........................................5-8
10. Seat warmer or seat cooler*...3-9, 3-11
11. Front blind spot monitoring system
ON button* ......................................4-79
12. Rear curtain folding button ...........4-124
13. Vehicle height control button*.........5-29
14. Sport mode button* ........................5-28
15. Passenger’s front air bag ...............3-51
* : if equipped
OVI012002L
Your vehicle at a glance
42
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-20
2. Radiator cap .....................................7-21
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-22
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-25
5. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-18
6. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-18
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-24
8. Fuse box ...........................................7-46
9. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-23
10. Jump start connector ........................6-4
❈ The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OBH018003/OBH011100
■
■
3.8 Engine
• MPI
• GDI
25
Your vehicle at a glance
OVI079001
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-20
2. Radiator cap .....................................7-21
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-22
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-25
5. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-18
6. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-18
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-24
8. Fuse box ...........................................7-46
9. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-23
10. Jump start connector ........................6-4
❈ The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■
4.6 Engine
Your vehicle at a glance
62
OBH011101
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-20
2. Radiator cap .....................................7-21
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-22
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-25
5. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-18
6. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-18
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-24
8. Fuse box ...........................................7-46
9. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-23
10. Jump start connector ........................6-4
❈ The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■
5.0 Engine
3
Seats / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-24
Child restraint system / 3-36
Air bag - supplemental restraint system / 3-45
Safety features of your vehicle
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat sliding forward or backward**/
Seat height and cushion tilting
adjustment
(2) Seat cushion length adjustment
(3) Seatback angle adjustment
(4) Head restraint height adjustment
(5) Driver position memory system
(6) Seat warmer or seat cooler*
(7) Massage seat adjustment*
(8) Lumbar support adjustment
Front passenger’s seat
(9) Seat sliding forward or backward/
Seat height and cushion tilting
adjustment*
(10) Seatback angle adjustment
(11) Head restraint height adjustment
(12) Seat warmer or seat cooler*
Rear seat
(13) Seat sliding forward or backward
adjustment with seatback angle
adjustment
(14) Seat sliding forward or backward
adjustment with seatback angle
adjustment
(15) Head restraint height adjustment*
(16) Easy access ON/OFF toggle switch
SEATS
OVI032001L
33
Safety features of your vehicle
(17) Seat warmer or seat cooler*
(Left seat)
(18) Seat warmer or seat cooler*
(Right seat)
(19) Front passenger's seat sliding and
seatback angle adjustment
(20) Relaxation mode switch (Front pas-
senger's seat sliding, seatback
angle, rear seat sliding and leg
support angle are operated simulta-
neously)
(21) Lumbar support adjustment
(for right seat)
(22) Leg support angle adjustment
(for right seat)
*: if equipped
**: The height of the driver's head
restraint is automatically adjusted
simultaneously with the driver's seat
sliding adjustment operation.
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for passengers
Riding in a vehicle with the seat-
back reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
seat is reclined during an accident,
the occupant’s hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the passen-
ger to keep the seatback in an
upright position whenever the vehi-
cle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an acci-
dent or a sudden stop. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result
because the seat belt can't operate
normally.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por-
tion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
while maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. We recom-
mend that your chest be at least
250 mm (10 inches) away from
the steering wheel.
Safety features of your vehicle
43
Front seat adjustment - power
The front seat can be adjusted by using
the control switch located on the doors.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so as to easily control the
steering wheel, pedals and switches on
the instrument panel.
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is complet-
ed. Excessive operation may
damage the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount of
electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary while the
engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control knobs at the same
time. Doing so may result in
power seat motor or electrical
component malfunction.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with the
engine start/stop button in OFF.
Therefore, children should never be
left unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
• Do not adjust the seat while wear-
ing seat belts. Moving the seat
cushion forward may cause
strong pressure on the abdomen.
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you oper-
ate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or back-
ward to move the seat to the desired
position. Release the switch once the
seat reaches the desired position.
When adjusting the seat position, the
headrest will be adjusted simultaneously
to the proper position.
Cushion length adjustment
(for driver’s seat)
Push the control switch forward or back-
ward to move the seat cushion to the
desired length. Release the switch once
the seat cushion reaches the desired
length.
Seatback angle
Push the upper part of the control switch
forward or backward to move the seat-
back to the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the desired
position.
OVI039002 OVI039003 OVI039004
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Seat cushion height
Push the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower the
front part of the seat cushion. Push the
rear portion of the control switch up to
raise or down to lower the height of the
seat cushion. Release the switch once
the seat reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch.
Press the front portion of the switch (1) to
increase support or the rear portion of
the switch (2) to decrease support.
To move the support position up or down,
press the switch (3) or (4).
Driver’s massage seat (if equipped)
You can operate the massage seat by
using the switch while the engine is run-
ning.
OVI039005 OVI039006 OVI041306N
37
Safety features of your vehicle
1. MODE 1
Moving the switch down operates the
massage system as follow:
To turn the system off, press the switch
or move it down once more.
2. MODE 2
Moving the switch up operates the mas-
sage system as follow:
To turn the system off, press the switch
or move it up once more.
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps to protect the head and neck
in the event of a collision.
OBH038075LOVI031104N
→ → →
← ← ←
1 2 3
2 3
→ → → → →
← ← ← ← ←
2 3 2 3
1 2 3 2
4
3
4
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height as the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may
occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest posi-
tion of the driver's seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted forward or
backward by pulling the lower part of the
headrest forward or backward to the
desired detent in the direction of the
arrow. Adjust the headrest so that it prop-
erly supports the head and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down - elec-
tric
Push the control switch up to raise or
down to lower the headrest. Release the
switch once the headrest reaches the
desired position.
Removal - electric
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go by pulling the switch up (1) then
pull the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes then pull the
switch down (4) until the headrest move
to the lowest position. To install the head-
rest securely, move the headrest up and
down 2 or 3 times by pulling the switch
up and down.
OVI039010OVI039007 OVI039072L
WARNING
If you don't install the headrest
securely, the active headrest may
not operate normally. When rein-
stalling the headrest, install it
securely as procedures.
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Electronic active headrest
The electronic active headrest is
designed to trigger the headrest forward
and upward when impact sensor detects
a rear impact. This helps to prevent the
driver's and front passenger’s heads
from moving backward and thus helps
minimize neck injuries.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. While the
engine is running, push either of the
switches to warm the driver's seat or the
front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
OBH038069
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle with the
headrests removed as severe injury
to the occupants may occur in the
event of an accident. Headrests
may provide protection against
neck injuries when properly adjust-
ed.
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to proper-
ly protect the occupants.
CAUTION
The active headrest is a safety
device to reduce injuries from a
rear impact. Do not hit or pull the
headrest intentionally.
OVI039011
Type B
Type A
Safety features of your vehicle
103
• Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat warmer
operating, the seat warmer will turn
OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the engine start/
stop button is turned to the ON posi-
tion.
✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers while the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The occupants
must be able to feel if the seat is
becoming too warm and to turn the
seat warmer off. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
In particular, the driver must exer-
cise extreme care for the following
types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat cooler (if equipped)
The seat cooler is provided to cool the
front seats during hot weather by blowing
air through small vent hole on the surface
of the seats and seatbacks. While the
engine is running, push the rear portion
of the switch to cool the driver's seat or
the front passenger's seat (if equipped).
When the operation of the seat cooler is
not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
• Each time you push the switch, the air-
flow is changed as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat cooler
operating, the seat cooler will turn
OFF.
• The seat cooler defaults to the OFF
position whenever the engine start/
stop button is turned to the ON posi-
tion.
OVI039012
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
CAUTION
• The seat cooler is a supplemen-
tary cooling system. Use the cli-
mate control seat when the cli-
mate control system is on. Using
the climate control seat for pro-
longed periods of time with the
climate control system off could
cause the climate control seat
performance to impair.
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the seats.
• Do not spill liquid such as water
or beverages on the surface of
the front seats and seatbacks, or
the air vent holes may be blocked
and prevented from working
properly.
• Do not place materials such as
plastic bags or newspapers under
the seats. The air vent may not
work properly as the air intake
can be blocked.
• When the air vent does not oper-
ate, restart the vehicle. If there is
no change, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
123
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s and driver’s
seatbacks.
Seatback table (if equipped)
The seatback table is provided on the
back of the front passenger's seatback
for the convenience of the rear passen-
ger.
To use the table, press the release button
then pull the table up.
Make sure that the table is secured by
pushing and pulling it.
To fold the table, push the table up as
high as you can and then lower the table.
Make sure that the table is secured.
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an acci-
dent they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occu-
pants.
OVI039013
OVI039014
OVI039015
WARNING
• Do not lean on the table or put
things over 10kg on the table.
This could result in serious injury
or damage the table.
• Do not use the table while driv-
ing. When you are not use the
table, fold the table down and
securely lock. Failure to observe
this caution could cause serious
injury or death.
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Rear seat adjustment - power
The rear seat can be adjusted by using
the control switches located on the door.
Forward, backward and seatback
angle
Push the control switch forward or back-
ward to move the seat to the desired
position. Release the switch once the
seat reaches the desired position.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with the
engine start/stop button in OFF.
Therefore, children should never be
left unattended in the vehicle.
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is complet-
ed. Excessive operation may
damage the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount of
electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary while the
engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control switches at the same
time. Doing so may result in
power seat motor or electrical
component malfunction.
WARNING
Use extreme caution so that hands
or other objects are not caught in
the seat mechanisms while the seat
is moving.
Do not adjust the seat while wear-
ing seat belts. Moving the seat
cushion forward may cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
WARNING
Do not operate the rear power seat
while the child seat is installed.
OVI032018C
Safety features of your vehicle
143
Easy access switch
Your vehicle features easy access sys-
tem to provide convenient access for rear
passengers. When opening the rear
door, the rear seats will move rearward
automatically to make passenger get off
easily. This easy access system will oper-
ate only when the control switch is in
"ON" position.
Additional switches for adjusting the
front passenger seat (if equipped)
In some vehicles, additional switches are
provided to move front passenger seat
forward and backward (1), and adjust the
seatback angle (2) from the rear seats.
The switches are located on the left side
of the front passenger’s seatback (A) and
on the rear seat center armrest (B). Do
not use these switches while the front
passenger seat is occupied.
OVI039019
OBH038013
OVI032020L
315
Safety features of your vehicle
Leg support
(for rear right passenger’s seat)
(if equipped)
The leg support can be adjusted by
pressing the switch (1), (2).
To move the leg support up, press the
switch (2) and to move the leg support
down, press the switch (1). Release the
switch once the leg support reaches the
desired position.
Lumbar support
(for rear right passenger’s seat)
(if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch.
Press the front portion of the switch (1) to
increase support or the rear portion of
the switch (2) to decrease support.
To move the support position up or down,
press the switch (3) or (4).
Rear relaxation seat system (for rear
right passenger’s seat) (if equipped)
The rear relaxation seat system provides
the passenger comfort.
The front passenger seat will move for-
ward and the seatback will fold forward to
provide space. The rear right side pas-
senger seat seatback will lean towards
the back of the vehicle and the leg sup-
port will pop up.
But if the front passenger’s side door is
opened, the rear comfort seat system will
not operate.
OVI039029 OVI039061OVI039028
Safety features of your vehicle
163
Front passenger side walk-in seat
Press the switch (1).
The seat will move forward and the seat-
back will fold automatically. After the
operation is completed, a beep will
sound once.
Press the switch (2).
The seat and seatback will move to its
original position. After the operation is
completed, a beep will sound once.
Rear relaxation seat system
Press the switch (3).
The front passenger seat will move for-
ward and the seatback will fold automati-
cally. Then the rear right side passenger
seat seatback will lean towards the back
of the vehicle and the leg support will pop
up. After the operation is completed, a
beep will sound once.
Press the switch (4).
The front passenger seat and the rear
right side passenger seat will move to its
original position. After the operation is
completed, a beep will sound.
Headrest
The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-
rests in all the seating positions for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps protect the
head and neck in the event of a collision.
OVI039062 OVI039063
OBH038076L
* : if equipped
*
317
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down - man-
ual
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Adjusting the height up and down - elec-
tric (if equipped)
Push the control switch up to raise or
down to lower the headrest. Release the
switch once the headrest reaches the
desired position.
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. The use
of a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not
recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to an occupant may occur
in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against severe neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
OVI039021 OVI039023
Safety features of your vehicle
183
Removal - manual
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling the headrest up (2).
Reinstall-manual
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes while press-
ing the release button (2). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height (1).
OVI039022
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle with the
headrests removed as severe injury
to the occupants may occur in the
event of an accident. Headrests
may provide protection against
neck injuries when properly adjust-
ed.
CAUTION
For your safety, the electric rear
headrest can't be removed. If there
is any problem with the electric rear
headrest, take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
OVI039068
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to proper-
ly protects the occupants.
319
Safety features of your vehicle
Wing-out (if equipped)
For rear passenger's convenience, the
ends of the headrest can be bent inward.
Rear center seat headrest (if equipped)
You can fold the rear center seat’s head-
rest by pressing the upper part of the
headrest while pushing the button (1).
To use the headrest, pull up the upper
part of the headrest.
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull the strap (1) (if
equipped) forward from the seatback.
OVI039024 OVI031025
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle with the
headrests folded as severe injury to
an occupant may occur in the event
of an accident. Headrests may pro-
vide protection against severe neck
injuries when properly adjusted.
OBH038074L
Safety features of your vehicle
203
Cup holder (if equipped)
To use the cup holder, push the button
(1).
Multi box (if equipped)
To use the multi box, push the button (2).
Close the cover after use.
Rear tower console storage
(if equipped)
These compartments can be used to
store small items.
To open the upper console storage,
press the button (2) and to open the
lower console storage, press the button
(1). Close the tower console storage after
use.
OVI031026
OVI049192
Type B
Type A
OVI031027
OVI049228L
Type B
Type A
OVI039030
321
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
rear seats during cold weather. While the
engine is running, push the switch to
warm the rear seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat warmer
operating, the seat warmer will turn
OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
WARNING
• To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the tower console storage
closed while driving.
• Close this lower and upper lid
while the vehicle is moving.
Failure to observe this instruc-
tion could cause death or serious
injury.
OVI039031
OVI039070
Type C
Type B
Type A
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
Safety features of your vehicle
223
Seat cooler (if equipped)
The seat cooler is provided to cool rear
seats during hot weather by blowing air
through small vent hole on the surface of
the seats and seatbacks. While the
engine is running, push the rear portion
of the switch to cool rear seats.
When the operation of the seat cooler is
not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
OVI039032
OVI039071
Type B
Type A
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers while the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The occupants
must be able to feel if the seat is
becoming too warm and to turn the
seat warmer off. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
In particular, the driver must exer-
cise extreme care for the following
types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
323
Safety features of your vehicle
• Each time you push the button, the air-
flow is changed as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat cooler
operating, the seat cooler will turn
OFF.
• The seat cooler defaults to the OFF
position whenever the engine start/
stop button is turned on.
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
CAUTION
• The seat cooler is a supplemen-
tary cooling system. Use the cli-
mate control seat when the cli-
mate control system is on. Using
the climate control seat for pro-
longed periods of time with the
climate control system off could
cause the climate control seat
performance to impair.
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the seats.
• Do not spill liquid such as water
or beverages on the surface of
the front seats and seatbacks, or
the air vent holes may be blocked
and prevented from working
properly.
• Do not place materials such as
plastic bags or newspapers under
the seats. The air vent may not
work properly as the air intake
can be blocked.
• When the air vent does not oper-
ate, restart the vehicle. If there is
no change, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
243
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he/she
must be properly belted and the
seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section
of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and par-
ticularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild
soap and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or damaged.
It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in
a severe impact even if damage to
the assembly is not obvious. Belts
should not be worn with straps
twisted. Each belt assembly must
only be used by one occupant; it is
dangerous to put a belt around a
child being carried on the occu-
pant's lap.
(Continued)
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt
webbing is straight and not twist-
ed.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged, replace it.
325
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning
Seat belt warning light
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the engine
start/stop button ON regardless of belt
fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after
the engine start/stop button is ON, the
seat belt warning light blinks again for
approximately 6 seconds.
Seat belt warning chime
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the engine start/stop button is
turned ON, the seat belt warning chime
will sound for approximately 6 seconds.
At this time, if the seat belt is fastened,
the chime will stop at once.
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
1GQA2083
B180A01NF-1
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly while driving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are
hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
Safety features of your vehicle
263
✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will be
able to pull the belt out smoothly.
Height adjustment (front seat)
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 4 positions for max-
imum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too near your neck. The
shoulder portion should be adjusted so
that it lies across your chest and midway
over your shoulder nearest the door and
not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) while press-
ing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appro-
priate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to per-
sonal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
OBH038022
Front seat
327
Safety features of your vehicle
When using the rear center seat belt, the
buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be
used. (if equipped)
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should auto-
matically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
B200A02NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt por-
tion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm nearest the door.
B210A01NF-1OVI031090
Safety features of your vehicle
283
Lap belt (if equipped)
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten a 2-point static type belt, insert
the metal tab (1) into the locking buckle
(2). There will be an audible "click" when
the tab locks into the buckle. Check to
make sure the belt is properly locked and
that the belt is not twisted.
With a 2-point static type seat belt, the
length must be adjusted manually so it
fits snugly around your body. Fasten the
belt and pull on the loose end to tighten.
The belt should be placed as low as pos-
sible on your hips, not on your waist. If
the belt is too high, it could increase the
possibility of your being injured in an
accident.
When using the rear center seat belt, the
buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be
used.
OVI039066
OVI039064
OHM039105N
B220B01NF/H
Too high
Shorten
Correct
Lengthen
Shorten
329
Safety features of your vehicle
To release the seat belt:
When you want to release the seat belt,
press the button (1) in the locking buckle.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive tension
on the driver or passenger's seat belt
when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt. (if equipped)
B210A02NF-1
WARNING
The center lap belt latching mecha-
nism is different from those for the
rear seat shoulder belts. When fas-
tening the rear seat shoulder belts
or the center lap belt, make sure
they are inserted into the correct
buckles to obtain maximum protec-
tion from the seat belt system and
assure proper operation.
OED030300
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twisted
and always sit properly on your
seat.
Safety features of your vehicle
303
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
✽
NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front passen-
ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated in certain frontal collisions.
The pre-tensioners will not be activat-
ed if the seat belts are not being worn
at the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal oper-
ating conditions and are not haz-
ardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged peri-
ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-
ed.
OBH038100
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehi-
cle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags
– that are provided in this manu-
al.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts prop-
erly.
331
Safety features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pre-
tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument
panel will illuminate for approximately
6 seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds, or
if it illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-
tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag
system as soon as possible.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After acti-
vation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be done
by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tension-
er seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadver-
tent activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehi-
cle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner
seat belt must be discarded, con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
Safety features of your vehicle
323
Pre-Safe Seat belt (PSB)
(if equipped)
The purpose of the pre-safe seat belt is
to prevent passengers from getting hurt
by tightening the seat belt right before a
collision or dangerous maneuver.
The pre-safe seat belt warning light will
illuminate if there is a problem with your
pre-safe seat belt.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position.
• The light stays on after illumination for
approximately 3 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
In order to maximize the safety of the
passenger, the pre-safe seat belt system
operates as below
• The seat belt is tightened when:
- The vehicle senses a collision
- Emergency braking situation occurs
- Losing control of the vehicle
- The passenger leans to one side
• The seat belt vibrates when:
- The vehicle senses a object too near
the vehicle
- The Lane Departure Warning System
(if equipped) detects the vehicle has
moved out of its lane
Other functions are tightening a loose
seat belt after vehicle speed is over 40
km/h. and winding a loose seat belt after
unfastening the seat belt.
OVI039069 OVI052090
CAUTION
The pre-safe seat belt activates only
when the passenger is wearing
his/her seat belt.
CAUTION
Do not be surprised when the seat
belt vibrates. It's not a malfunction
but a warning for your safety.
333
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. For
more information about the use of these
restraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the Safety Standards of your
country. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets Safety
Standards of your country. The restraint
must be appropriate for your child's
height and weight. Check the label on
the child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occu-
pant seating contained in this man-
ual.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and chil-
dren. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehi-
cle. The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
Safety features of your vehicle
343
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened and snugged on the hips
and as low as possible. Check periodical-
ly if belt fits. A child's squirming could put
the belt out of position. Children are
given the most safety in the event of an
accident when they are restrained by a
proper restraint system in the rear seat. If
a larger child (over age 12) must be seat-
ed in the front seat, the child should be
securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position. Children
age 12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a
child age 12 and under in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-
es the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul-
der belt assemblies whenever possible
according to specific recommendations
by their doctors. The lap portion of the
belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND
LOW AS POSSIBLE on the hips, not a
cross the abdomen.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should con-
sult a physician for recommendations.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen
where the fetus is located or above
the abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
335
Safety features of your vehicle
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve max-
imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-
tem, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front and rear seats should be in
an upright position when the car is mov-
ing. A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down in
the rear seat or if the front and rear seats
are in a reclined position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be disas-
sembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected peri-
odically for wear or damage of any kind.
Any damaged parts should be replaced
as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. Additional questions concern-
ing seat belt operation should be directed
to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop. The protec-
tion of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against
your hips and chest to work proper-
ly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant's hips will slide
under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's
neck could strike the shoulder belt.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seat-
backs upright.
Safety features of your vehicle
363
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child and/or
infant safety seats must be properly placed
and installed in the rear seat.You must use
a commercially available child restraint
system that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or
by a tether anchor and/or ISOFIX anchors
(if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger-side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint sys-
tem can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside tempera-
ture does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the lug-
gage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in the case of a sudden
stop or an accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
WARNING
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passen-
ger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the child restraint
system manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use of
the child restraint.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the vehicle
and your child is securely
restrained in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the vehicle’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over your-
self and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
337
Safety features of your vehicle
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the man-
ufacturer's instructions.
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an acci-
dent.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the vehicle is
parked in direct sunlight. Always
check seat belt buckles before
fastening them over a child.
• After an accident, have an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat belt,
tether anchor and lower anchor.
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint system
because of the driver's seat,
install the child restraint system
in the rear right seat.
CRS09
OVI039033
Forward-facing child restraint system
Rearward-facing child restraint system
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadver-
tently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the win-
dows, or lock themselves or oth-
ers inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and repo-
sition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always proper-
ly position and secure children in
the rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floor of a
moving vehicle. During a colli-
sion or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicle’s interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING
Do not operate the rear power seat
(if equipped) while the child seat is
installed.
Safety features of your vehicle
383
For safety reasons, we recommend that
the child restraint system be used in the
rear seats.
Installing a child restraint system by
lap belt (on the center rear seat)
(if equipped)
To install a child restraint system on the
center rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on the
center rear seat.
2. Extend the latch plate tongue of the
lap belt.
3. Route the lap belt through the restraint
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
4. Buckle the seat belt and adjust the lap
belt for a snug hold on the child
restraint by pulling on the loose end of
the belt. After installation of the child
restraint system, try to move it in all
directions to be sure the child restraint
system is securely installed.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, have
the system checked immediately
by your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint systems and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
increase the chance and/or
severity of injury in an accident.
1GHA2260/H
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
339
Safety features of your vehicle
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, follow-
ing the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. After installa-
tion of the child restraint system, try to
move it in all directions to be sure the
child restraint system is securely
installed.
If you need to tighten the belt, pull more
webbing toward the retractor. When you
unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to
retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passen-
ger emergency locking usage condition.
OEN036101 OEN036104E2MS103005
Safety features of your vehicle
403
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system
(if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the package tray.
Seating position
Age group
0 : Up to 10 kg
XUU
(0 - 9 months)
0+ : Up to 13 kg
XUU
(0 - 2 years)
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
X
UU
(9 months - 4 years)
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
XUU
(4 - 12 years)
Front
passenger
Rear
outboard
Rear
center
Child seat restraint suitability for seat position using the seat belt - For Europe
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your
children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.
OVI039034
U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
X : Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group
341
Safety features of your vehicle
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrest,
route the tether strap under the head-
rest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over
the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the child restraint
seat.
OVI039035
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multiple
seats may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not prop-
erly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint sys-
tem is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
Safety features of your vehicle
423
Securing a child restraint system
with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether
Anchorage” system (if equipped)
ISOFIX is a standardised method of fit-
ting child seats that eliminates the need
to use the standard adult seat belt to
secure the seat in the vehicle. This
enables a much more secure and posi-
tive location with the added benefit of
easier and quicker installation.
An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if it
has vehicle-specific approval in accor-
dance with the requirements of ECE-
R44.
There is a child restraint symbol located
on the lower portion of each side of the
rear seatbacks. These symbols indicate
the position of the lower anchors for child
restraints so equipped.
On each side of the rear seat, between
the cushion and backrest, are located a
pair of ISOFIX anchorage points togeth-
er with a top tether mounting on the shelf
behind the rear seats. During the installa-
tion, the seat has to be engaged at the
anchorage-points in a way you can hear
it clicking (check by pulling!) and has to
be fixed with the Top Tether-belt on the
belonging point on the shelf behind rear
seats.
The installing and the use of a child-seat
has to be done according to the
installing-manual, which is added to the
ISOFIX-seat.
OVI039060
OVI031036N
ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
WARNING
Install the child restraint seat fully
rearward against the seatback with
the seatback in a vertical position,
not reclined.
343
Safety features of your vehicle
To secure the child restraint seat
1. To engage the child restraint seat to
the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child
restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX
anchor. Listen for the audible “click”
sound.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
child restraint hook holder and tighten
to secure the seat. (Refer to the previ-
ous page.)
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat,
all unused vehicle rear seat belt
metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt web-
bing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking
hold of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around the
lower anchors. Also make sure
that the seat belt is not caught in
the lower anchors.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt web-
bing to get scratched or pinched by
the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX
anchor during the installation.
WARNING
• Do not install a child restraint seat
at the center of the rear seat using
the vehicle's ISOFIX anchors. The
ISOFIX anchors are only provided
for the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Do not misuse
the ISOFIX anchors by attempting
to attach a child restraint seat in
the middle of the rear seat to the
ISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the
child restraint seat ISOFIX attach-
ments may not be strong enough
to secure the child restraint seat
properly in the center of the rear
seat and may break, causing seri-
ous injury or death.
• Do not mount more than one child
restraint to a child restraint lower
anchorage point. The improper
increased load may cause the
anchorage points or tether anchor
to break, causing serious injury or
death.
• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-
patible child restraint seat only to
the appropriate locations shown in
the illustration.
• Always follow the installation and
use instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
Safety features of your vehicle
443
F ISO/L1 - X X -
G ISO/L2 - X X -
E ISO/R1 - IUF IUF -
E ISO/R1 - IUF IUF -
D ISO/R2 - IUF IUF -
C ISO/R3 - IUF IUF -
D ISO/R2 - IUF IUF -
C ISO/R3 - IUF IUF -
B ISO/F2 - IUF IUF -
B1 ISO/F2X - IUF IUF -
A ISO/F3 - IUF IUF -
Rear Outboard
(Passenger side)
Rear Outboard
(Driver side)
Front Passenger
FixtureSize ClassMass Group
Carrycot
0 : UP to 10kg
0+ : UP to 13kg
I : 9 to 18kg
Rear Center
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in this mass group and/or this size class.
Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions- For Europe
345
Safety features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
(5) Driver’s knee air bag
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
OVI039037
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and
severity of injury in the event of a
collision or rollover.
Safety features of your vehicle
463
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the engine
start/stop button is turned to the ON or
START position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
a serious frontal collision or side colli-
sion in order to help protect the occu-
pants from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a col-
lision and its direction. These two fac-
tors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the densi-
ty and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. The determining factors are
not limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will sim-
ply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of the
extremely short time in which a collision
occurs and the need to inflate the air
bag between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occupant
impacts those structures. This speed of
inflation reduces the risk of serious or
life-threatening injuries in a severe col-
lision and is thus a necessary part of air
bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also caus-
es the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steer-
ing wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possi-
ble (at least 250 mm (10 inches)
away). The front passengers
should always move their seats
as far back as possible and sit
back in their seat.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of collision, and passen-
gers may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
a proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
347
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it can
cause serious or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, be sure to install the
child restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain air
bags could cause serious injury
or death to an infant or child.
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the igni-
tion of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-
comfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after impact in order to reduce dis-
comfort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though the smoke and powder are non-
toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult a doctor if the
symptom persists.
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger’s seat.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraints in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it could cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
1JBH3051
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage area’s
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
Safety features of your vehicle
483
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag -
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
• The light blinks when the engine
start/stop button is in ON position.
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following com-
ponents:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. Driver’s knee air bag module
11. Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt buckle sensors.
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the engine
start/stop button is ON to determine if a
crash impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light " " on
the instrument panel will illuminate for
about 6 seconds after the engine
start/stop button is turned to the ON posi-
tion, after which the SRS air bag warning
light " " should go out.
W7-147 OVI039100L
WARNING
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag
system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the engine
start/stop button to the ON posi-
tion.
• The light stays on after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the engine
start/stop button is in ON posi-
tion.
349
Safety features of your vehicle
The front air bag modules are located in
the center of the steering wheel, in the
front passenger's panel above the glove
box and/or in the driver’s side knee bol-
ster. When the SRSCM detects a suffi-
ciently severe impact to the front of the
vehicle, it will automatically deploy the
front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other con-
trols.
OHM039102N
Driver’s front air bag (1)
OHM039103N OHM039104N
Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
Safety features of your vehicle
503
WARNING
• Do not install or place any acces-
sories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a pas-
senger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liq-
uid air freshener inside the vehi-
cle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous pro-
jectile and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggra-
vate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
• The SRS can function only when
the engine start/stop button is in
the ON position. If the SRS " "
warning light does not illuminate,
or continuously remains on after
illuminating for about 6 seconds
when the engine start/stop but-
ton is turned to the ON position,
or after the engine is started,
comes on while driving, the SRS
is not working properly. If this
occurs, have your vehicle imme-
diately inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. Never remove
or replace the air bag related
fuse(s) when the engine
start/stop button is in the ON
position. Failure to heed this
warning will cause the SRS “ ”
warning light to illuminate.
351
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and the lap/shoulder belts at both the
driver and passenger seating positions.
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "SRS AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover in the
steering wheel and/or on the cover of the
driver's side knee bolster located below
the steering wheel and the passenger's
side front panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel , in the knee bolster below
the steering wheel column and the pas-
senger's side front panel above the glove
box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity. The SRS uses sensors to gath-
er information about the driver's seat
position, the driver's and front passen-
ger's seat belt usage and impact severi-
ty.
OVI039041
Passenger’s front air bag
OVI039038
OVI039039
Driver’s knee air bag
Driver’s front air bag
Safety features of your vehicle
523
The seat belt buckle sensors (if
equipped) determine if the driver and
front passenger's seat belts are fas-
tened. These sensors provide the ability
to control the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fas-
tened, and how severe the impact is.
(Continued)
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest place
for children of any age to ride.
• Front and side impact air bags
can injure occupants improperly
positioned.
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passen-
gers can be severely injured by
inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in an
upright position.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, driver’s side knee bolster,
and the front passenger's panel
above the glove box, because any
such object could cause harm if
the vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the air bags to
deploy.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
“ ”remains illuminated while
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the air bag imme-
diately after deployment.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitu-
dinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
(Continued)
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with con-
siderable force and in the blink of
an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-
pants in proper position to obtain
maximum benefit from the air bag.
Even with air bags, improperly belt-
ed and unbelted occupants can be
severely injured when the air bag
inflates. Always follow the precau-
tions about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in this
manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maxi-
mum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
(Continued)
353
Safety features of your vehicle
Side impact air bag
(Continued)
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
• A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occu-
pants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-
sarily close to the air bag while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the engine start/stop
button is in the OFF position.
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occu-
pant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
OVI039042
OVI039043
OVI039073L
Front
Rear
Safety features of your vehicle
543
(Continued)
• Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side impact
air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
door and the seat. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the sup-
plemental side impact air bag
inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal injury,
avoid impact to the side impact
sensor when the ignition switch
is on.
• If the seat or seat cover is dam-
aged, have the vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer because your
vehicle is equipped with side
impact air bags.
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front and outboard
rear seat. The purpose of the air bag is to
provide the vehicle's driver and/or the
front and outboard rear passengers with
additional protection than that offered by
the seat belt alone.
• The side impact air bags are designed
to deploy during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
• The side impact air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact.
WARNING
• The side impact air bag is sup-
plemental to the driver’s and the
passengers seat belt systems
and is not a substitute for them.
Therefore your seat belts must be
worn at all times while the vehicle
is in motion. The air bags deploy
only in certain side impact condi-
tions severe enough to cause
significant injury to the vehicle
occupants.
• For best protection from the side
impact air bag system and to
avoid being injured by the
deploying side impact air bag,
both front and all rear (if
equipped) seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened. The
driver's hands should be placed
on the steering wheel at the 9:00
and 3:00 positions. The passen-
ger’ arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
(Continued)
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors,
put their arms on the doors, stretch
their arms out of the window, or
place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
355
Safety features of your vehicle
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-
tain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash sever-
ity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain
air bags are not designed to deploy in all
side impact situations, collisions from the
front or rear of the vehicle or in most
rollover situations.
WARNING
• In order for side and curtain air
bags to provide the best protec-
tion, front seat occupants and
outboard rear occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belts properly fastened.
Importantly, children should sit in
a proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
(Continued)
OBH038051N
OVI039074L
(Continued)
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system. Make sure to
position the child restraint sys-
tem as far away from the door
side as possible, and secure the
child restraint system in a locked
position.
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. This should only
be done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle occu-
pants in an accident.
Safety features of your vehicle
563
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expect-
ed to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (front)
(4) Side impact sensor (rear)
OVI039044/OVI039045/OVI039046/OVI039047/OVI039048
1
2
3 4
357
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensi-
ty, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
OVI039049
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body or B and C pil-
lars where side collision sensors
are installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing aftermarket bumper
guards or replacing a bumper
with non-genuine parts may
adversely affect your vehicles
collision and air bag deployment
performance.
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
583
Side impact and curtain air bags
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact. Side impact and curtain
air bags are designed to inflate only in
side impact collisions, but they may
inflate in other collisions if the side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads,
the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully
on unimproved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
OVI039051
OVI039053
OVI039075L
359
Safety features of your vehicle
• Frontal air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case, inflat-
ed air bags would not be able to pro-
vide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, side impact and curtain air
bags may inflate depending on the
intensity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional bene-
fit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
OBH038060OVI039053OVI039052
Safety features of your vehicle
603
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be signifi-
cantly reduced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-
dents because air bag deployment
would not provide protection to the
occupants.
However, side impact and curtain air
bags may inflate when the vehicle is
rolled over by a side impact collision, if
the vehicle is equipped with side
impact air bags and curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not deliv-
ered to the sensors.
OVI039054 OBH038062 OVI039055
361
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate
when you turn the ignition ON, or if it con-
tinuously remains on, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any
work on the steering wheel, the front
passenger's panel, front seats and roof
rails must be performed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of
the SRS system may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to inflate.
• If the air bags inflate, they must
be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If components of the air bag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to
follow these precautions and pro-
cedures could increase the risk
of personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on the
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
the engine; have the car towed to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
623
Additional safety precautions
• All occupants should sit upright, fully
back in their seats with their seat belts
on and their feet on the floor.
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wear-
ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-
gency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between them-
selves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side air bag covers could interfere with
the proper operation of the air bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring har-
nesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
Adding equipment to or modifying
your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior struc-
ture or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and your feet on
the floor.
363
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of poten-
tial risk of air bag system.
Note that these government warnings
focus on the risk to children, we also
want you to be aware of the risks which
adults are exposed to. Those have been
described in previous pages.
OVI039057L
4
Smart key / 4-3
Theft-alarm system / 4-9
Door locks / 4-11
Trunk / 4-16
Windows / 4-24
Hood / 4-28
Fuel filler lid / 4-30
Sunroof / 4-33
Driver position memory system / 4-37
Steering wheel / 4-39
Mirrors / 4-42
Instrument cluster / 4-47
Parking assist system / 4-72
Parking guide system / 4-75
Front blind spot monitoring system / 4-79
Rearview camera / 4-80
Hazard warning flasher / 4-80
Lighting / 4-81
Wipers and washers / 4-88
Interior light / 4-92
Defroster / 4-95
Automatic climate control system / 4-96
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-109
Features of your vehicle
Clean air mode / 4-112
Storage compartment / 4-113
Interior features / 4-117
Multimedia system / 4-128
Features of your vehicle
4
43
Features of your vehicle
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door (and trunk) and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
Smart key functions
Carrying the smart key, you can lock and
unlock the vehicle doors (and trunk).
Also, you may start the engine. Refer to
the following for more details.
Locking
Pressing the button of the outside door
handles with all doors (and trunk) closed
and any door unlocked, locks all the
doors (and trunk). The hazard warning
lights blink once to indicate that all doors
(and trunk) are locked. The button will
only operate when the smart key is with-
in 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle. If you put your hand in the
outside door handle to check that the
doors lock, doors may open.
If you want to make sure that a door has
locked or not, you should check the door
lock button inside the vehicle or check
that the hazard warning lights blink once.
Even though you press the outside door
handle buttons, the doors will not lock
and the chime will sound for 3 seconds if
any of following occur:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The engine start/stop button is in ACC
or ON position.
• Any door except the trunk is open.
Unlocking
Carrying the smart key with you while all
doors locked and if you put your hand in
the outside door handle for approximate-
ly 0.5 second, all doors will unlock. The
hazard warning lights blink twice to indi-
cate that all doors (and trunk) are
unlocked. You can open the door by
pulling the outside door handle. The
smart key is only recognized in the area
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle.
When the smart key is recognized in the
area of 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the out-
side door handle, other people can also
open the door without possession of the
smart key.
SMART KEY
OVI049001
OVI049005
Unlock
Lock
Features of your vehicle
44
Trunk unlocking (if equipped)
When all doors are locked, if you are
within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the out-
side trunk handle with your smart key in
your possession, the trunk will unlock
and open when you press the trunk han-
dle switch.
Also, once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will be locked automati-
cally.
If you close the trunk when the smart key
is in the trunk, the chime will sound for 5
seconds. The trunk will unlock and open
when you press the trunk handle switch.
Start-up
You can start the engine without inserting
the key. For detailed information refer to
“Engine start/stop button” in section 5.
Buttons on the smart key
Lock (1)
All doors (and trunk) are locked if the lock
button is pressed while all doors are
closed.
If all doors (and trunk) are closed, the
hazard warning lights blink once to indi-
cate that all doors (and trunk) are locked.
However, if any door (or trunk) remains
open, the hazard warning lights will not
operate. If all doors (and trunk) are
closed after the lock button is pressed,
the hazard warning lights blink.
If you press the lock button one more
time within 4 seconds after all doors are
locked by pressing the lock button, the
outside rearview mirror will be folded.
(if equipped)
Unlock (2)
All doors (and trunk) are unlocked if the
unlock button is pressed.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that all doors (and trunk) are
unlocked.
However, after pressing this button, the
doors (and trunk) will lock automatically
unless you open any door within 30 sec-
onds.
If you press the unlock button one more
time within 4 seconds after all doors are
unlocked by pressing the unlock button,
the outside rearview mirror will be unfold-
ed. (if equipped)
OVI049004
45
Features of your vehicle
Trunk unlock (3)
Without power trunk
The trunk is unlocked if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second when all
doors are locked.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that the trunk is unlocked.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed with all doors locked, the trunk will
be locked automatically.
With power trunk
The trunk is opened automatically if the
button is pressed for more than 1 sec-
ond.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that the trunk will swing
upward.
Alarm (4)
The horn sounds and the hazard warning
lights blink for about 30 seconds if this
button is pressed for more than 0.5 sec-
ond. To stop the horn and lights, press
any button on the transmitter.
Smart key precautions
✽
NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to lose
your smart key, you will not be able to
start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if
necessary, and contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, you should immedi-
ately take the vehicle and key to your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer to pro-
tect it from potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any of
following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- You keep the smart key near a
mobile two-way radio system or a
cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
CAUTION
The power trunk can be operated
when the engine is not running.
However, the power trunk con-
sumes large amounts of vehicle
electric power. To prevent the bat-
tery from being discharged, do not
operate them consecutively (more
than approximately 10 times).
Features of your vehicle
64
(Continued)
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the smart key could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or send-
ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing
the smart key and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
Restrictions in handling keys
When leaving keys with parking lot and
valet attendants, the following proce-
dures will ensure that your vehicle’s trunk
and glove box compartment can not be
opened in your absence.
OVI049003
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
47
Features of your vehicle
To activate the trunk lock system so that
the trunk can only be opened with the
mechanical key, perform the following:
1.
Depress and hold the release button
(1) and remove the mechanical key (2).
(To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.)
2. Unlock the glove box by using the
mechanical key then open it.
3. Set the trunk lid control button to OFF
position (not depressed).
4. Close and lock the glove box using the
mechanical key.
When leaving your keys with a parking lot
attendant or valet, perform steps 1 to 4
above, remove the mechanical key from
the smart key and leave the smart key
with the attendant. In this manner the
smart key can only be used to start the
engine and operate door locks.
Lock release
To release the trunk lock feature, open
the glove box with the mechanical key
and set the trunk lid control button to ON
position (depressed). In this position the
trunk will open with the trunk lid button or
smart key.
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for sever-
al years, but if the smart key is not work-
ing properly, try replacing the battery with
a new one. If you are unsure how to use
your smart key or replace the battery,
contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
The circuit inside the smart key can
have a problem if exposed to moisture
or static electricity. If you are unsure
how to use your smart key or replace the
battery, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OBH048004
OVI049002
Features of your vehicle
84
1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart
key.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the smart key to malfunc-
tion. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
• Circuits inside the smart key may
develop problems when dropped,
exposed to moisture or static
electricity.
• If you suspect that your smart key
might have sustained some dam-
age, or you feel your smart key is
not working correctly, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
49
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
This system is designed to provide pro-
tection from unauthorized entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-
gered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
Armed stage
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Make sure that all doors, the engine
hood and trunk lid are closed and
latched.
3. • Lock the doors by depressing the
door lock button on the smart key.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door, trunk lid or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning
lights won’t operate and theft-alarm
will not arm. If all doors, trunk lid and
engine hood are closed, the hazard
warning lights blink once.
• Lock the doors by pressing the button
of the front outside door handles with
the smart key in your possession.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door, trunk lid or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning
lights won’t operate and theft-alarm
will not arm. To arm the system, close
all the doors, trunk lid and engine
hood, and try again to lock the doors.
• Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passen-
ger(s) remains in the vehicle, the
alarm may be activated when the
remaining passenger(s) leave the
vehicle. If any door, trunk lid or
engine hood is opened within 30
seconds after entering the armed
stage, the system is disarmed to
prevent unnecessary alarm.
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
Features of your vehicle
104
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A door is opened without using the
smart key.
• The trunk is opened without using the
smart key.
✽
NOTICE
If the trunk is opened by using the smart
key, the alarm will not be activated, but
doors, hood, and engine start/stop but-
ton keep arming condition.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will be locked and
armed automatically.
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
approximately 30 seconds. To turn off the
system, unlock the doors with the smart
key.
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when:
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- Putting your hand in the outside door
handle for about 0.5 second while car-
rying the smart key.
After the doors are unlocked, the hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the system is disarmed.
After unlocking the door, if any door (or
trunk) is not opened within 30 seconds,
the system will be rearmed.
✽
NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine while
the alarm is activated. The vehicle
starter motor is disabled during the
theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed, unlock
the doors by inserting the mechanical
key into the key hole and turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle, then
turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position and wait for 30 sec-
onds. Then the system will be dis-
armed. (except China)
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction and should only be
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the theft-alarm system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
411
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from out-
side the vehicle
• To lock the doors, press the button of
the outside door handle while carrying
the smart key with you or press the
lock button on the smart key.
• To unlock the doors, put your hand in
the outside door handle for approxi-
mately 0.5 second or press the unlock
button on the smart key.
• If the smart key does not operate nor-
mally, you can lock or unlock the door
by using the mechanical key. Depress
and hold the release button (1) and
remove the mechanical key (2). Insert
the mechanical key in to the key hole
(3) and turn the key toward the rear of
the vehicle to unlock and toward the
front of the vehicle to lock.
• To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door all
vehicle doors will lock/unlock automat-
ically.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door locks
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
DOOR LOCKS
OVI049005
OVI049002
Unlock
Lock
WARNING
• If you don't close the door
securely, the door may open
again.
• Be careful that someone's body
and hands are not trapped when
closing the door.
Features of your vehicle
124
• To lock a door without the key, push the
inside door lock button (1) or central
door lock switch (2
)
to the “Lock” posi-
tion and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors
will lock automatically.
✽
NOTICE
Always engage the parking brake, close
all windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
Power door latch (if equipped)
If a door isn’t closed completely but is
closed to the first detent position, the
door will be close automatically.
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The
red mark (2) on the button will be visi-
ble.
• To lock a door, push the door lock but-
ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the door lock button will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
OVI049008
Lock
Unlock
OVI049007
WARNING
If the door is open slightly, be care-
ful not to nip fingers in the door.
CAUTION
Before closing the door, ensure that
all obstructions are removed.
OVI049006
413
Features of your vehicle
• If the inner door handle of the driver’s
(or front passenger’s) door is pulled
when the door lock button is in lock
position, the button is unlocked and
door opens. (if equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is opened.
With central door lock switch
Operate by depressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pressing the right portion (1) for
the driver or the left portion (3) of the
switch for the front passenger, all vehi-
cle doors will lock.
• When pressing the left portion (2) for
the driver or the right portion (4) of the
switch for the front passenger, all vehi-
cle doors will unlock.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle and
any door is opened, the doors will not
lock even though the lock button (1) or
(3) of the central door lock switch is
pressed.
WARNING - Door lock mal-
function
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehi-
cle, try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
OVI049009
Driver’s door
OVI049010L
Front passenger’s door
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehi-
cle is in motion to prevent acci-
dental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discour-
age potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows down.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-
cles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
Features of your vehicle
144
Impact sensing door unlock sys-
tem
All doors will be automatically unlocked
after an impact causes the air bags to
deploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will be automatically locked
after the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h
(9 mph). And all doors will be automati-
cally unlocked when you turn the engine
off.
✽
NOTICE
You can select some auto door lock/
unlock features in the INFO menu of
DIS (Driver Information System, if
equipped) as follows;
• Speed sensing auto door lock
• Auto door unlock by unlocking the
driver's door lock button
• Auto door unlock when the smart key
is removed from the smart key holder.
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting the
shift lever out of P (Park) or into P
(Park)
If you want this feature, refer to the DIS
manual (if equipped) supplied separate-
ly.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehi-
cle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possi-
bly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
415
Features of your vehicle
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally open-
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehi-
cle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock (1) located
on the rear edge of the door to the lock
( ) position. When the child safety
lock is in the lock position, the rear
door will not open even though the
inner door handle is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle.
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (2) until the rear door
child safety lock is unlocked ( ).
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To pre-
vent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used when-
ever children are in the vehicle.
OVI049011
Features of your vehicle
164
Without the power trunk
Opening the trunk
• The trunk is locked or unlocked when
all doors are locked or unlocked with
the smart key or central door lock
switch.
• To open the trunk only while all doors
are locked, press the trunk unlock but-
ton on the smart key for more than 1
second, press the button on the trunk
handle with the smart key in your pos-
session, or insert the mechanical key
of the smart key into the lock and turn
it clockwise.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk is locked automatical-
ly.
• If the trunk is unlocked, it can be
opened by pulling the handle up.
• To open the trunk by using the trunk lid
release button, press the button and
pull up the trunk handle.
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock and
trunk mechanisms may not work prop-
erly due to freezing conditions.
TRUNK
OVI049013
OVI049012
Type B
Type A
417
Features of your vehicle
Closing the trunk
To close the trunk, lower the trunk lid,
then press down it until it locks. To be
sure the trunk lid is securely fastened,
always check by trying to pull it up again.
Power trunk (if equipped)
The power trunk can be opened or
closed automatically with the smart key,
the power trunk main control button, the
open button, or the close button on the
trunk.
If you depress the power trunk main con-
trol button, open button, or close button
while operating the power trunk, you
could stop operating the power trunk.
If that happens, to operate the power
trunk again, push any button.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
trunk before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
trunk lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the trunk is not closed
prior to driving.
WARNING
The trunk swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when open-
ing the trunk.
WARNING
The trunk lid should be always kept
completely closed while the vehicle
is in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases may
enter the vehicle and serious ill-
ness or death may result.
CAUTION
For your safety, do not leave the
power trunk open for a long time, it
could also to prevent unnecessary
charging system drain.
WARNING
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might operate
the power trunk that could result in
injury to themselves or others, or
damage to the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
184
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, the power
trunk may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
Power trunk main control button
Pressing the power trunk main control
button opens the power trunk automati-
cally.
To close the power trunk, press the
power trunk main control button until the
power trunk is closed securely.
WARNING
Make sure there are no people or
objects around the trunk before
operating the power trunk. Wait
until the trunk is open fully and
stopped before loading or unload-
ing cargo or passengers from the
vehicle.
WARNING
Make sure the trunk is closed firm-
ly before driving. If the trunk is
open, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury or
death to vehicle occupants.
CAUTION
Do not close or open the power
trunk manually. This may cause
damage to the power trunk. If it is
necessary that close or open the
power trunk manually when the bat-
tery is discharged or disconnected,
do not apply excessive force.
OVI049013
419
Features of your vehicle
Power trunk open button
Pressing the power trunk open button
opens the power trunk automatically.
To open the power trunk with all doors
closed and locked, press the power trunk
open button while carrying the smart key.
Power trunk close button
Pressing the power trunk close button
while the power trunk is opened, closes
the power trunk automatically.
Power trunk lock button
Pressing the power trunk lock button
while carrying the smart key, closes the
power trunk automatically, locks all
doors, and arms the system.
The chime sound will operate if you
press the power trunk lock button when:
- Any door is open.
- The engine start/stop button is not in
the OFF position.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
OVI049014 OVI049015 OVI049016
Features of your vehicle
204
Power trunk non-opening conditions
The power trunk will not open or close
automatically, when the vehicle is moving
more than 3 km/h (1.8 mph).
✽
NOTICE
If there are obstacles such as snow on
the power trunk, it may not open auto-
matically. After remove the obstacle, try
to open it again.
✽
NOTICE
• The power trunk can be operated
when the engine is not running.
However the power trunk operation
consumes large amounts of vehicle
electric power. To prevent the battery
from being discharged, do not operate
it excessively e.g.: more than approxi-
mately 10 times repeatedly.
• To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the power trunk
in the open position for a long lime.
• Do not apply excessive force while
operating the power trunk. This could
cause damage to the power trunk.
• Do not modify or repair any part of
the power trunk by yourself. This
must be done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle, do
not operate the power trunk. This
could cause the power trunk to oper-
ate improperly.
Automatic stop and reversal
If, during power opening or closing, the
trunk is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the power trunk will detect the
resistance, and it will stop movement or
move to the full open position to allow the
object to be cleared.
However, if the resistance is weak such
as from an object that is thin or soft, or
the trunk is near the latched position, the
automatic stop and reversal may not
detect the resistance and the closing
operation will continue. Also, if the power
trunk is forced by a strong impact, the
automatic stop and reversal may oper-
ate.
WARNING
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might operate
the power trunk that could result in
injury to themselves or others, or
damage to the vehicle.
OVI049017
421
Features of your vehicle
If the automatic stop and reversal feature
operates continuously more than twice
during one opening or closing operation,
the power trunk may stop at that position.
At this time, close the trunk manually and
operate the trunk automatically again.
How to reset the power trunk
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, or if the related fuse has
been replaced or disconnected, for the
power trunk to operate normally, reset
the power trunk as follow:
1. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
2. Close the trunk manually.
If the power trunk doesn't work properly
after above procedure, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Trunk lid control button
• When the trunk lid control button is
ON(depressed), the power trunk can
be controlled with the power trunk
main control button, power trunk open,
close button, and the smart key.
• When the trunk lid control button is
OFF (not depressed), the power trunk
can controlled with the mechanical key
of the smart key only.
WARNING
• Never intentionally place any
object or part of your body in the
path of the power trunk to make
sure the automatic stop operates.
• Make sure all faces, arms, hands,
body parts and any other obstruc-
tions are safely out of the way
before operating the power trunk.
• Never place any object or part of
your body in the path of the
power trunk. This could result in
serious injury or cause damage
to the vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people or
objects around the trunk before
operating the power trunk.
OVI049018
OFF ON
Features of your vehicle
224
✽
NOTICE
Close the trunk, and keep the trunk lid
control button in the OFF (not
depressed) position before washing the
vehicle in an automatic car wash.
Emergency trunk safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an emer-
gency trunk safety release lever located
inside the trunk. When someone is inad-
vertently locked in the trunk, the trunk
can be opened by moving the lever in the
direction of the arrow and pushing open
the trunk.
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with
the power trunk. Keep the trunk lid
control button in the OFF (not
depressed) position when not in
use. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional power
operation by a child.
WARNING
Even though the trunk lid control
button is in the OFF (not
depressed) position, the trunk will
still be propelled upward by
mechanical force if the trunk is
manually opened more than 10
degrees beyond the fully closed
position. In addition, if the trunk is
manually closed to the secondary
latch position, the trunk will be
electrically moved to the fully
latched position. Make sure that
face, arms, hands, and other
obstructions are safely out of the
way before operating the trunk.
OVI049019
423
Features of your vehicle
Close the power trunk when the
battery negative cable is discon-
nected or the battery is separated.
The power trunk is not closed complete-
ly when the battery negative cable is dis-
connected or the battery is separated.
When you disconnect the battery nega-
tive cable or separate the battery, do as
follow.
1. Open the power trunk lid.
2. Lock the trunk lid latch by pressing it
with a pen or equivalent.
3. Disconnect the negative cable or sep-
arate the battery.
4. Release the trunk lid latch by moving
the emergency trunk release lever in
the direction of the arrow.
5. Close the trunk lid manually. Close it
fully by gently pressing its upper cen-
ter portion.
OVI049209 OVI049019
WARNING
Separating the battery from the
vehicle should be done in an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
trunk safety release lever in this
vehicle and how to open the
trunk if you are accidentally
locked in the trunk.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk at any time. The
trunk is a very dangerous loca-
tion in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emer-
gencies only. Use with extreme
caution, especially while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Features of your vehicle
244
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power win-
dow switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch
and curtain switch (if equipped)
(4) Rear door (right) power window switch
and curtain switch (if equipped)
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up/down
(7) Power window lock switch
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power windows
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
WINDOWS
OVI049020L
425
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
The engine start/stop button must be in
the ON position for power windows to
operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door's window. The driv-
er has a power window lock switch which
can block the operation of passenger
windows. The power windows can be
operated for approximately 30 seconds
after the engine start/stop button turned
to the ACC or OFF position. However, if
the front doors are opened, the power
windows cannot be operated even within
the 30 second period.
✽
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
in an open (or partially open position),
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This
noise is a normal occurrence and can be
reduced or eliminated by taking the fol-
lowing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows down,
partially lower both front windows
approximately one inch. If you expe-
rience the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof
opening.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the win-
dows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corre-
sponding switch to the first detent posi-
tion (5).
Auto up/down window
Pressing or pulling up the power window
switch momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers or lifts the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up or press down and
release the switch.
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power window
system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the engine start/stop button to the
ON position.
2. Close the window and continue pulling
up on the power window switch for at
least 1 second.
OVI049021
Features of your vehicle
264
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8
in.) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approxi-
mately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
✽
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for all
windows are only active when the “auto
up” feature is used by fully pulling up
the switch. The automatic reverse fea-
ture will not operate if the window is
raised using the halfway position on the
power window switch.
Rear door window curtain
(if equipped)
The rear door window curtain is useful to
shade off the sunlight. You can fold or
unfold it with the power window switch on
the driver's door or the rear door.
1. Close the window by pulling up the
switch.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper win-
dow channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resist-
ance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
OBH048200
OVI049146L
OVI049147L
Driver’s door
Rear door
427
Features of your vehicle
2. To set up the curtain, pull up the switch
once more.
3. If you want to open the curtained win-
dow, fold the curtain first by pushing
down the switch. Then you can open
the window by pushing the switch once
again.
Resetting the rear door window curtain
If the curtain is not operated correctly, the
curtain must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the engine start/stop button to the
ON position.
2. Close the curtain by pressing the
power window switch to the first detent
position and continue pulling up the
switch for at least 10 seconds.
If the curtain doesn't work properly after
above procedure, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽
NOTICE
The rear door window curtain may not
operate normally, when the temperature
in the vehicle is lower than -15°C.
Power window lock button
• The driver can disable the power win-
dow switches on the passenger doors
by pressing the power window lock but-
ton located on the driver’s door to the
LOCK position (pressed).
• When the power window lock button
is in the LOCK position (pressed),
the driver’s master control cannot
operate the passenger door power
windows.
OVI049022
CAUTION
• If the upward or downward move-
ment of the curtain is blocked by
an object or part of the body, the
curtain will detect the resistance
and will stop movement and
move downward.
• Do not apply excessive force
while operating the curtain. This
could cause damage to the cur-
tain.
Features of your vehicle
284
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the smart key in the
vehicle.
• NEVER leave any child unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entan-
gle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a win-
dow.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the dri-
ver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(depressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend a face or arms out-
side the window while driving.
HOOD
OBH048025L
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do not
open or close two windows or
more at the same time. This will
also ensure the longevity of the
fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting
the shift lever to the P(Park) posi-
tion, and setting the parking brake.
429
Features of your vehicle
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, pull up the secondary
latch (1) inside of the hood center and
lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will completely raise
by itself after it has been raised about
halfway.
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-
lowing:
• All filler caps in the engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
WARNING
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood raised. The view will be
blocked and the hood could fall
or get damaged.
OVI049023
Features of your vehicle
304
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pressing the fuel
filler lid open button located on the dri-
ver’s door.
✽
NOTICE
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the lid to break the ice
and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid.
If necessary, spray around the lid with
an approved de-icer fluid (do not use
radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle
to a warm place and allow the ice to
melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. Push the fuel filler lid opener button,
then the fuel filler lid slowly open (1).
3. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank
cap (2) counterclockwise.
4. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-
ly and make sure that it is securely
closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
OVI049024
OVI049025
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
431
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fab-
ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static elec-
tricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-
line source.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
(Continued)
WARNING - Refueling dan-
gers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines care-
fully. Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Read and follow all warning at the
gas station facility.
• Before refueling note the location
of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-
Off, if available, at the gas station
facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Use only approved portable plas-
tic fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cel-
lular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
324
Emergency fuel filler lid release
If the fuel filler lid does not open using
the remote fuel filler lid release, you can
open it manually by pulling the handle
outward slightly.
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refuel-
ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-
cle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire depart-
ment. Follow any safety instruc-
tions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel require-
ments" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event of
an accident.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle excessively,
otherwise the luggage area trim or
release handle may be damaged.
OVI049026
433
Features of your vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the over-
head console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the engine start/stop but-
ton is in the ON position.
✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
• After washing the car or after there is
rain, be sure to wipe off any water
that is on the sunroof before operating
it.
✽
NOTICE
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted while
in an open or slide position.
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI049027
CAUTION
Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sunroof
is fully open, closed, or tilt. Damage
to the motor or system components
could occur.
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or sun-
shade while driving. This could
result in loss of control and an acci-
dent that may cause death, serious
injury, or property damage.
Features of your vehicle
344
Sliding the sunroof
To open or close the sunroof (manual
slide feature), pull or push the sunroof
control lever backward or forward to the
first detent position.
Pulling the control lever downward also
closes the sunroof.
To open or close the sunroof automati-
cally, pull or push the sunroof control
lever backward or forward to the second
detent position. The sunroof will slide all
the way open or closed. To stop the sun-
roof sliding at any point, pull or push the
sunroof control lever momentarily in the
opposite direction of sunroof movement.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detect-
ed while the sunroof is closing automati-
cally, it will reverse direction, and then
stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding
glass and the sunroof sash. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof before
closing it.
Tilting the sunroof
To open the sunroof (autotilt feature),
push the sunroof control lever upward to
the second detent. The sunroof will tilt all
the way open. To stop the sunroof tilting
at any point, operate the control lever.
To close the sunroof, pull the sunroof
lever downward until the sunroof moves
to the desired position.
OVI049030OVI049028 OVI049029
435
Features of your vehicle
Sunshade
The sunshade will automatically open
with the glass panel when the glass
panel moves. Close it manually if you
want it closed.
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that someone’s head,
hands and body are not trapped
by a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof
while driving.
• Make sure your hands and face
are safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be dam-
aged.
• While using sunroof for a long
time, a dust between sunroof and
roof panel can make a noise. Open
the sunroof and regularly remove
the dust using clean cloth.
CAUTION
The sunroof is made to slide
together with the sunshade. Do not
leave the sunshade closed while
the sunroof is open.
OVI049031
Features of your vehicle
364
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-
nected or discharged, or related fuse is
blown, you must reset your sunroof sys-
tem as follows:
1. Turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position and close the sunroof
completely.
2. Release the control lever.
3. Pull and hold the control lever down-
ward until the sunroof tilts and slightly
moves up and down. Then, release
the lever.
4. Pull and hold the control lever down-
ward until the sunroof is operated as
follows;
TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN →
SLIDE CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof sys-
tem is reset.
❈ For more detailed information, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or
discharged, or related fuse is
blown, the sunroof may operate
improperly.
437
Features of your vehicle
A driver position memory system is pro-
vided to store and recall the driver seat,
outside rearview mirror and steering
wheel positions with a simple button
operation. By saving the desired positions
into the system memory, different drivers
can reposition the driver seat, outside
rearview mirror and steering wheel based
upon their driving preference. If the bat-
tery is disconnected, the position memo-
ry will be lost and the driving positions
should be restored in the system.
✽
NOTICE
If the memory system does not operate
normally, have the driver position mem-
ory system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
engine start/stop button is ON.
2. Adjust the driver seat, outside
rearview mirror and steering wheel to
positions comfortable for the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control panel.
The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or
2) within 5 seconds after pressing the
SET button. The system will beep
twice when the memory has been suc-
cessfully stored.
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
engine start/stop button is ON.
2. To recall the position in memory, press
the desired memory button (1 or 2).
The system will beep once, then the
driver seat, outside rearview mirror
and steering wheel will automatically
adjust to the stored positions.
Adjusting one of the control knobs for the
driver seat, outside rearview mirror and
steering wheel while the system is recall-
ing the stored positions will cause the
movement for that component to stop
and move in the direction that the control
knob is moved. Other components will
continue to the recalled position.
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the driver
position memory system while the
vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property damage.
WARNING
Use caution when recalling adjust-
ment memory while sitting in the
vehicle. Push the seat position con-
trol knob to the desired position
immediately if the seat moves too
far in any direction.
OVI049032
Features of your vehicle
384
Easy access function
(if equipped)
The steering wheel will move away from
the driver and the seat will move rear-
ward, when the engine start/stop button
is turned to the OFF position or when you
pull out the smart key from the smart key
holder with the shift lever in the P posi-
tion.
The steering wheel will move toward the
driver and the seat will move forward,
when the engine start/stop button is
turned to the ACC position or when you
insert the smart key into the smart key
holder with the shift lever in the P posi-
tion.
✽
NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the easy
access function in the INFO menu of
DIS (Driver Information System, if
equipped) as follows (if equipped);
• Seat easy access
• Steering easy access
If you want detailed informations, refer
to the DIS manual (if equipped) sup-
plied separately.
Reverse parking aid function
(if equipped)
When you shift the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) position, the outside rearview
mirror(s) will move downward to aid
reverse parking. According to the posi-
tion of the outside rearview mirror switch
(1), the outside rearview mirror(s) will
operate as follows:
OVI049033
439
Features of your vehicle
Left or Right : When the L or R switch is
selected, both outside
rearview mirrors will
move downward.
Neutral : When neither switch is select-
ed, the outside rearview mir-
rors will not operate.
✽
NOTICE
The outside rearview mirrors will auto-
matically revert to their original posi-
tions under the following conditions:
1. Engine start/stop button is turned to
the ACC or OFF position.
2. Shift lever is moved to any position
except R.
3. Remote control outside rearview mir-
ror switch is not selected.
Power steering
Power steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the vehi-
cle. If the engine is off or if the power
steering system becomes inoperative,
the vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steer-
ing checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering
(EHPS)
EHPS uses an electromotor to assist you
in steering the vehicle. It senses the vehi-
cle speed and road condition.
If the engine is off or if the power steer-
ing system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steer-
ing checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
STEERING WHEEL
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel
against a stop (extreme right or left
turn) for more than 5 seconds with
the engine running. Holding the
steering wheel for more than 5 sec-
onds in either position may cause
damage to the power steering
pump.
Features of your vehicle
404
✽
NOTICE
If the power steering drive belt breaks
or if the power steering pump malfunc-
tions, the steering effort will greatly
increase.
✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather
(below -10°C/14°F), the power steering
may require increased effort when the
engine is first started. This is caused by
increased fluid viscosity due to the cold
weather and does not indicate a mal-
function.
When this happens, increase the engine
RPM by depressing accelerator until the
RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release or
let the engine idle for two or three min-
utes to warm up the fluid.
Tilt steering
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You can
also raise it to give your legs more room
when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instru-
ment panel warning lights and gauges.
Electric type
Adjust the steering wheel angle (2) and
position (3) with the switch (1). Never
adjust the position of the steering wheel
while driving.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of the
steering wheel while driving. You
may lose steering control and
cause severe personal injury,
death or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
OVI049034
441
Features of your vehicle
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the engine start/stop button in the
ON position, pressing the heated steer-
ing wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button is illu-
minated.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The indica-
tor on the button is turned off.
Approximately 30 munities after the heat-
ed steering wheel is turned on, it will be
turned off automatically.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-
bol on your steering wheel. Check the
horn regularly to be sure it operates
properly.
✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indi-
cated by the horn symbol on your steer-
ing wheel (see illustration). The horn
will operate only when this area is
pressed.
OVI049036
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharp-
pointed object.
CAUTION
Do not install any grip for conven-
ient to operate the steering wheel.
This causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
OVI049035
Features of your vehicle
424
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window is
seen. Make this adjustment before you
start driving.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with
compass
1. Feature Control Button
2. Status Indicator LED
3. Rear Light Sensor
4. Display Window
Automatic dimming rear view mirror con-
trols automatically the glare of headlights
of the vehicle behind you when it turned
on by pressing and holding the button for
more than 3 but less than 6 seconds. It is
turned off by pressing and holding the
button for same time once more.
1. To operate Compass feature
Press and release the button, then the
vehicle's directional heading will be dis-
played. Pressing and releasing the button
again will turn off the display.
Heading display
- E : East
- W : West
- S : South
- N : North
ex) NE : North East
2. Calibration procedure
Press and hold the button for more than
9 but less than 12 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C" will
appear in the display.
- Driving the vehicle in a circle at less
than 8km/h 2 times or until the compass
heading appears.
- Driving in a circle in right-handed direc-
tion and opposite direction are possible,
and if the calibration is completed, the
compass heading will appear.
- Keep driving in a circle until a compass
heading appears.
MIRRORS
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat which would interfere with
your vision through the rear win-
dow.
WARNING
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident which could cause
death, serious injury or property
damage.
OVI049037L
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident
or deployment of the air bag.
443
Features of your vehicle
3. Setting the compass zone
1. Find your current location and vari-
ance zone number on the zone map.
2. Press and hold the button for more
than 6 but less than 9 seconds. The
current zone number will appear in the
display.
3. Press the button until the new zone
number appears in the display. After
you stop pressing the button in, the
display will show a compass direction
within a few seconds.
4. Changing Mirror Angle setting
(if equipped):
Due to mirror positions being angled
towards the driver, the compass mirror
can also compensate for drivers seated
on the Left Hand side of the vehicle
(steering wheel on the LH side of the
vehicle) or Right Hand side of the vehicle
(steering wheel on the RH side of the
vehicle).
To adjust the Left Hand, “L” or Right
Hand, “R”, setting:
1. Press and hold the button for more
than 12 seconds.
2. Release then press the button to tog-
gle between “L” and “R”.
✽
NOTICE
This procedure also causes the compass
to be de-calibrated.
B520C01JM
Europe
B520C03JM
Asia
B520C04JM
South America
B520C05JM
Africa
Features of your vehicle
444
3. To re-calibrate the compass, drive the
vehicle in 2 complete circles at less
than 8km/h (5mph).
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust the mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
hand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The mir-
ror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
CAUTION
1.Do not install the ski rack, anten-
na, etc. which are attached to the
vehicle by means of a magnet.
They affect the operation of the
compass.
2.If the compass deviates from the
correct indication soon after
repeated adjustment, have the
compass checked at an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
3.The compass may not indicate
the correct compass point in tun-
nels or while driving up or down a
steep hill.
(The compass returns to the cor-
rect compass point when the
vehicle moves to an area where
the geomagnetism is stabilized.)
4.When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mir-
ror housing.
OVI049039
WARNING - Rearview mir-
rors
• The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. In some countries, the
left outside rearview mirror is
also convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of fol-
lowing vehicles when changing
lanes.
445
Features of your vehicle
Remote control
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror, press
the R or L button (1) to select the right
side mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point ( ) on the
mirror adjustment control to position the
selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, press the R or L button
again to prevent the inadvertent adjust-
ment.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radi-
ator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
OVI049040
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch is
pressed. Do not press the switch
longer than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
Features of your vehicle
464
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric chromic mirror automatically
controls the glare from the headlights of
the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and automati-
cally controls the headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into R
(Reverse), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehi-
cle. If the ECM of inside rear view mirror
operates, it will be working
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Electric Type
To fold the outside rearview mirror, press
the button.
To unfold it, press the button again.
The engine start/stop button must be in
the ON position for the electric outside
rearview mirrors to fold.
The electric folding outside rearview mir-
ror can be operated for approximately 30
seconds after the engine start/stop but-
ton is turned to the ACC or OFF position.
Also, the outside rearview mirror can be
folded when you press the door lock but-
ton on the smart key within 4 seconds
after locking the doors by pressing the
button.
The outside rearview mirror can be
unfolded when you press the door unlock
button on the smart key within 4 seconds
after unlocking the doors by pressing the
button.
OVI049041
CAUTION
In case of the electric type of out-
side rearview mirror, don’t fold it by
hand. It could cause the failure of
the motor.
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liq-
uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-
ing.
447
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Engine temperature gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. Shift position indicator
7. Odometer/Tripmeter
8. Fuel gauge
9. LCD screen
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details refer to the "Gauges" in
the next pages.
OVI042050L
Features of your vehicle
484
ON/OFF the welcome and good-
bye sound
You can turn on or off the welcome and
goodbye sound when you open the dri-
ver's door.
1. Turn the engine start/stop button to the
ACC position.
2. Press and hold the DISP button on the
steering wheel for approximately 5
seconds.
3. When the LCD display changes like
the picture, you can choose on or off
mode by pressing the DISP button.
Then press the TRIP button.
Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle’s parking lights or
headlights are on, rotate the illumination
control knob to adjust the instrument
panel illumination intensity.
Gauges
OVI049051OVI049211L
OVI041052N
Type B
Type A
Type C
OVI049052
OVI041052C
449
Features of your vehicle
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-
ters per hour and/or miles per hour.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approxi-
mate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
When the door is open, or if the engine is
not started within 1 minute, the tachometer
pointer may move slightly in ON position
with the engine OFF. This movement is
normal and will not affect the accuracy of
the tachometer once the engine is running.
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the engine
start/stop button is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“H” position, it indicates overheat-
ing that may damage the engine.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
OVI049053 OVI049054
Features of your vehicle
504
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-
tion 8.
The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which will illumi-
nate when the fuel tank is near empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier than
usual due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
OVI049055
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
E level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a very low fuel
level. Running out of fuel, could
cause the engine to misfire damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
451
Features of your vehicle
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving,
including odometer, tripmeter, elapsed
time, average speed, average fuel con-
sumption (if equipped), instant fuel con-
sumption (if equipped) and distance to
empty on the display when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. All stored
driving information (except odometer) is
reset if the battery is disconnected.
TRIP Button
Push the TRIP button for less than 1 sec-
ond to select tripmeter function as fol-
lows:
Odometer (km or mi.)
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
The odometer is always displayed until
the display is turned off.
TRIP A
TRIP B
OVI049056L OVI049057
Features of your vehicle
524
Tripmeter (km or mi.)
TRIP A : Tripmeter A
TRIP B : Tripmeter B
This mode indicates the distance of indi-
vidual trips selected since the last trip-
meter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
999.9 km (0.0 to 999.9 miles).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A or
TRIP B) is being displayed, clears the
tripmeter to zero (0.0).
DISP Button
Press the DISP button to change
between modes.
OVI049058 OVI049059L
Distance to empty
Average speed
Instant and average fuel con-
sumption (if equipped)
AV information (if equipped)
LCD OFF
Driving time
Type A
Type B
ECO Driving ON/OFF
(if equipped)
Turn by turn Navigation
(if equipped)
453
Features of your vehicle
Distance to empty (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 50 km (30
miles), “---” will be displayed.
The meter’s working range is from 50 to
990 km (30 to 990 miles).
Instant fuel consumption (if equipped)
(l/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the instant fuel
consumption during the last few sec-
onds.
Average fuel consumption (if equipped)
(l/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average con-
sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal-
culated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 50 m (0.03 miles).
Pressing the DISP button (or the RESET
button) for more than 1 second, when the
average fuel consumption is being dis-
played, clears the average fuel consump-
tion to zero (---).
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after
refueled more than 6 l, the average fuel
consumption will be cleared to zero (---).
OVI049060L OVI049062L OVI049063L
Features of your vehicle
544
Average speed (km/h or MPH)
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the
engine is running.
Pressing the DISP button (or the RESET
button) for more than 1 second, when the
average speed is being displayed, clears
the average speed to zero (---).
Driving time
This mode indicates the total time trav-
eled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps going while the engine
is running.
The meter’s working range is from
0:00~99:59.
Pressing the DISP button (or the RESET
button) for more than 1 second, when the
driving time is being displayed, clears the
driving time to zero (0:00).
✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-
cle.
• The fuel consumption (if equipped)
and distance to empty values may
vary significantly based on driving
conditions, driving habits, and condi-
tion of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an esti-
mate of the available driving distance.
This value may differ from the actual
driving distance available.
OVI049064L OVI049065L
455
Features of your vehicle
ECO Driving ON/OFF mode (if equipped)
You can turn the ECO indicator on/off on
the instrument cluster in this mode.
If you push the DISP button (or the
RESET button) more than 1 second in
the ECO Driving ON mode, ECO Driving
OFF is displayed in the screen and the
ECO indicator turns off while driving.
If you want to display the ECO indicator
again, press the DISP button (or the
RESET button) more than 1 second in
the ECO Driving OFF mode and then
ECO Driving ON mode is displayed in the
screen.
AV information (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the AV
(RADIO, CD, USB, AUX etc.).
Turn by turn navigation (if equipped)
This mode displays the information of the
navigation.
OVI042260L OVI049219L OVI041301N
Features of your vehicle
564
Warnings and indicators
All warning lights are checked by turning
the engine start/stop button ON. Any light
that does not illuminate should be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off. The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
ECO indicator (if equipped)
The ECO indicator is a system that
informs you to drive economically.
It is displayed if you drive fuel efficiently
to help you improve fuel efficiency.
• The ECO indicator (green) will turn on
when you are driving fuel efficiently in
the ECO Driving ON mode.
If you don't want the indicator dis-
played, you can turn the ECO Driving
ON mode to OFF mode by pressing
the DISP button (or the RESET but-
ton).
As per ECO Driving ON/OFF mode
operation, refer to the previous page.
• The fuel-efficiency can be changed by
the driver's driving habit and road con-
dition.
• It doesn't work at the condition which
doesn't meet economical driving such
as P (Park), N (Neutral), R (Reverse)
or sports mode.
• While the instant fuel consumption
mode is displayed on the LCD screen,
the ECO indicator turns off (if
equipped).
WARNING
Don't keep watching the indicator
while driving. It will distract you
while driving and cause an acci-
dent that results in severe personal
injury.
OVI052091
457
Features of your vehicle
ECO-P indicator
(if equipped)
With intelligent accelerator
pedal (if equipped)
The ECO-P (pedal) indicator light will illu-
minate when the ECO-P button is
pressed. If the fuel efficiency is low, the
reactive force of intelligent accelerator
pedal will be increased. It is allow to con-
trol over excess acceleration and you can
drive fuel efficiently to help you improve
fuel efficiency.
If you press the ECO-P button again, the
indicator light turns off and the intelligent
accelerator pedal is not operated in ECO
driving mode.
For more information, refer to "Intelligent
accelerator pedal" in section 5.
Air bag warning light
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the engine start/stop button to the
ON position.
This light also comes on when the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is
not working properly. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not come on, or
continuously remains on after operating
for about 6 seconds when you turn the
engine start/stop button to the ON posi-
tion or start the engine, or if it comes on
while driving, have the SRS inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
This light illuminates if the engine
start/stop button is turned ON and goes
off in approximately 3 seconds if the sys-
tem is operating normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the engine start/stop but-
ton is turned to the ON position, this indi-
cates that the ABS may have malfuc-
tioned.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible. The normal braking
system will still be operational, but with-
out the assistance of the anti-lock brake
system.
ECO-P
Features of your vehicle
584
Electronic brake force distri-
bution (EBD) system warning
light
If two warning lights illumi-
nate at the same time while
driving, the ABS and EBD
system may have malfunc-
tioned.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
✽
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-
ing light is on and stays on, the
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
may not work. In this case, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
Seat belt warning
Seat belt warning light
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the engine
start/stop button ON regardless of belt
fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after
the engine start/stop button is ON, the
seat belt warning light blinks again for
approximately 6 seconds.
Seat belt warning chime
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the engine start/stop button is
turned ON, the seat belt warning chime
will sound for approximately 6 seconds.
At this time, if the seat belt is fastened,
the chime will stop at once.
Turn signal indicator
The blinking green arrows on the instru-
ment panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
it indicates a malfunction in the turn sig-
nal system.You should consult your deal-
er for repairs.
This indicator also blinks when the haz-
ard warning switch is turned on.
WARNING
If the both ABS and brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehi-
cle’s brake system will not work
normally during sudden braking. In
this case, avoid high speed driving
and abrupt braking. Have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
459
Features of your vehicle
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the high beam posi-
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Tail light indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the tail
lights or headlights are ON.
LED headlamp (low beam)
malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
The LED headlamp (low beam) malfunc-
tion indicator comes on or blinks if there
is malfunction of the LED headlamp and
related parts.
Continuous driving with the indicator
remains on can reduce LED headlamp
(low beam) life. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the system checked.
Engine oil pressure
warning light
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driv-
ing:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the engine is not stopped imme-
diately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is run-
ning, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on while the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunc-
tion.
If this happens, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off
the engine and check the oil level. If
the oil level is low, fill the engine oil
to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately. In any
instance where the oil light stays on
when the engine is running, the
engine should be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer before
the car is driven again.
Features of your vehicle
604
Parking brake & brake fluid
warning light
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the engine
start/stop button in the ON position. The
warning light should go off when the
parking brake is released while the
engine is running.
The parking brake warning chime will
sound to remind you that the parking
brake is applied when you are driving
above 10 km/h (6 mph). Always release
the parking brake before you drive.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have the vehicle towed to any author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for a brake sys-
tem inspection and necessary repairs.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-
nal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
car. Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion of the
brake system working. If the brakes fail
while you are driving, shift to a lower gear
for additional engine braking and stop the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the engine start/
stop button is in the ON position.
Low tire pressure
telltale (if equipped)
The low tire pressure telltale comes on
for 3 seconds after the engine start/stop
button is turned to the ON position.
If the warning light does not come on, or
continuously remains on after coming on
for about 3 seconds when you turned the
engine start/stop button to the ON posi-
tion, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System is not working properly. If this
occurs, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
These warning lights will also illuminate if
one or more of your tires are significantly
under-inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible. If
the warning lights illuminate while driv-
ing, reduce vehicle speed immediately
and stop the vehicle. Avoid hard braking
and overcorrecting at the steering wheel.
Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
placard.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, have the
brakes checked and repaired imme-
diately by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
461
Features of your vehicle
Low tire pressure position indicator
(if equipped)
If one or more of your tires are signifi-
cantly under-inflated, this indicator indi-
cates which tire is significantly under-
inflated by illuminating the corresponding
position light.
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
The TPMS malfunction indicator comes
on for 3 seconds after the engine
start/stop button is turned to the ON posi-
tion. If the warning light does not come
on, or continuously remains on after
coming on for about 3 seconds when you
turned the engine start/stop button to the
ON position, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System is not working proper-
ly. If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
The warning light also comes on and
stays on when there is a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If this happens, the system may not mon-
itor the tire pressure. Have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING - Low tire pres-
sure
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and can
contribute to loss of vehicle control
and increased braking distances.
Continued driving on low pressure
tires will cause the tires to overheat
and fail.
OVI069003L
TPMS
Features of your vehicle
624
For more information about the TPMS,
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System” in section 6.
Shift pattern indicator
The indicator displays
automatic transmission
shift lever is selected.
Front fog light indicator
This light comes on when the front fog
lights are ON.
Charging system warning
light
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the genera-
tor drive belt for looseness or break-
age.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-
lem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer correct the problem
as soon as possible.
Trunk lid open warning
light
This warning light illuminates when the
trunk lid is not closed securely with the
ignition in any position.
Door ajar warning light
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the igni-
tion in any position.
WARNING - Safe stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes
gradually and with light force,
and slowly move to a safe posi-
tion off the road.
463
Features of your vehicle
Door open position indicator
This indicator illuminates when a door,
hood or trunk is not closed securely.
The indicator displays that which one is
opened.
Immobilizer indicator
If any of the following occurs, the immo-
bilizer indicator illuminates, blinks or the
light goes off.
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if
the engine start/stop button is turned
to the ACC or ON position, the indica-
tor will illuminate until the engine is
started. However, when the smart key
is not in the vehicle, if the engine
start/stop button is pressed, the indica-
tor will blink for a few minutes to indi-
cate that you are not be able to start
the engine.
• When the engine start/stop button is
turned to the ON position from the
ACC position without the smart key in
the vehicle, the indicator blinks for a
few minutes to indicate that you are not
be able to start the engine.
• When the battery is weak, if the engine
start/stop button is pressed, the indica-
tor will blink and you are not be able to
start the engine. However, you are able
to start the engine by inserting the
smart key in the smart key holder. If
smart key system related parts have a
problem, the indicator will blink.
Low fuel level warning light
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
Low washer fluid level
warning light
This warning light indicates the washer
fluid reservoir is near empty. Refill the
washer fluid as soon as possible.
OVI049220L
Features of your vehicle
644
Malfunction indicator light
(MIL) (check engine light)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indi-
cates that a potential malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the emis-
sion control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
engine start/stop button is turned to the
ON position, and will go out in a few sec-
onds after the engine is started. If it illu-
minates while driving, or does not illumi-
nate when the engine start/stop button is
turned to the ON position, take your vehi-
cle to your nearest authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.
ESP (Electronic Stability
Program) indicator
The ESP indicator will illuminate when
the engine start/stop button is turned
ON, but should go off after approximate-
ly 3 seconds. If the indicator does not
come on, or continuously remains on
after coming on for about 3 seconds
when you turned the engine start/stop
button to the ON position, or if the indica-
tor comes on while driving, the ESP is
not working properly. Take your vehicle to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the system checked.
When the ESP is on, it monitors the driv-
ing conditions and under normal driving
conditions, the ESP light will remain off.
When a slippery or low traction condition
is encountered, the ESP will operate,
and the ESP indicator will blink to indi-
cate the ESP is operating.
CAUTION
Prolonged driving with the
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION
If the Malfunction Indicator Light
illuminates, potential catalytic con-
verter damage is possible which
could result in loss of engine
power. Have the Engine Control
System inspected as soon as pos-
sible by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
465
Features of your vehicle
ESP OFF indicator
The ESP OFF indicator will illuminate
when the engine start/stop button is
turned ON, but should go off after
approximately 3 seconds. To switch to
ESP OFF mode, press the ESP OFF but-
ton. The ESP OFF indicator will illumi-
nate indicating the ESP is deactivated.
VSM OFF indicator
(if equipped)
To switch to VSM OFF mode, press the
VSM OFF button. The VSM OFF indica-
tor will illuminate indicating the VSM is
deactivated.
If this indicator stays on when VSM OFF
is not selected, the VSM may have mal-
functioned. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the system checked.
Cruise indicator (if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the CRUISE
button on the steering wheel is pressed.
The indicator light turns off when the
CRUISE button is pressed again. For
more information about the use of cruise
control, refer to “Cruise control system or
Smart cruise control system” in section 5.
Cruise SET indicator
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
function switch (SET- or RES+) is ON.
The cruise SET indicator light in the
instrument cluster or on the LCD screen
is illuminated when the cruise control
switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed. The
cruise SET indicator does not illuminate
when the cruise control switch (CAN-
CEL) is pushed or the system is disen-
gaged.
SET
VSM
OFF
Features of your vehicle
664
Smart cruise control warning light
(if equipped)
SCC (Smart cruise control) malfunction
indicator
The warning light illuminates when the
vehicle to vehicle distance control sys-
tem is not operated normally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
SCC (Smart cruise control) sensor mal-
function indicator
If the sensor or the cover is stained the
indicator will illuminate. Remove the
stains with a soft cloth.
For more information about the use of
smart cruise control, refer to "Smart
cruise control system" in section 5.
Key reminder warning chime
(if equipped)
If the driver’s door is opened while the
smart key is in the vehicle with the
engine start/stop button in ACC or the
smart key is in the smart key holder with
the engine start/stop button in OFF, the
key reminder warning chime will sound.
The chime sounds until the smart key is
removed from the smart key holder or the
driver’s door is closed.
OVI049221OVI049222
467
Features of your vehicle
Pre-safe seat belt warning light
(if equipped)
If the PSB indicator continuously remains
on after coming on for about 3 seconds
when you turned the engine start/stop
button to the ON position, or if the indica-
tor comes on while driving, the PSB is
not working properly. Take your vehicle to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the system checked.
Lane departure warning
system indicator
(if equipped)
The LDWS indicator will illuminate when
you turn the lane departure warning sys-
tem on by pressing the LDWS switch.
For more information, refer to "lane
departure warning system(LDWS)" in
section 5.
Lane departure warning system mal-
function indicator (if equipped)
If the LDWS FAIL warning indicator
comes on, the LDWS is not working
properly. Take your vehicle to an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
OVI059016LOVI052090
LDWS
Features of your vehicle
684
Overspeed warning
(if equipped)
Overspeed warning light
If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or
more, the overspeed warning light will
blink. This is to prevent you from over-
speeding.
Overspeed warning chime
If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or
more, the overspeed warning chime will
sound for about 5 seconds. This is to pre-
vent you from overspeeding.
EPB (Electric Parking
Brake) malfunction indica-
tor
The EPB malfunction indicator will illumi-
nate when the engine start/stop button is
turned to ON, but should go off after
approximately 3 seconds. If the warning
light does not come on, or continuously
remains on after coming on for about 3
seconds when you turned the engine
start/stop button to the ON position, the
Electric Parking Brake is not working
properly.
If it comes on while driving, the EPB is
not working properly.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
The EPB malfunction indicator may illu-
minate when the ESP indicator comes on
to indicate that the ESP is not working
properly, but if this occurs, it does not
indicate malfunction of the EPB.
AUTO HOLD indicator
If you press the AUTO HOLD switch, the
AUTO HOLD indicator on the cluster
comes on white. And when you stop the
vehicle completely by pressing the brake
pedal, the indicator changes from white
to green.
For more information, refer to “AUTO
HOLD” in section 5.
120
km/h
EPB
AUTO
HOLD
469
Features of your vehicle
AFLS (Adaptive Front
Lighting System)
malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
If the AFLS malfunction indicator comes
on, the AFLS is not working properly.
Drive to the nearest safe location and
restart the engine. If the indicator contin-
uously remains on, take your vehicle to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the system checked.
SPORT mode indicator
(if equipped)
The SPORT indicator light will illuminate
when the SPORT button is pressed. It
enables you to drive dynamically. The
indicator light turns off when the SPORT
button is pressed again. The sporty driv-
ing mode returns to the normal mode.
For more information, refer to "Electronic
controlled suspension" in section 5.
ECS (Electronic Control
Suspension) malfunction
indicator (if equipped)
The ECS malfunction indicator will illumi-
nate when the engine start/stop button is
turned to ON, but should go off after
approximately 3 seconds. If the warning
light does not come on, or continuously
remains on after coming on for about 3
seconds when you turn the engine
start/stop button to the ON position, the
ECS is not working properly.
If it comes on while driving, the electron-
ic control suspension is not working
properly.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
Warning on the LCD screen
Key not in vehicle
If the smart key is
not in the vehicle
and if any door is
opened or closed
with the engine
start/ stop button
in ACC, ON, or
START, the warn-
ing illuminates on
the LCD display.
The chime also sounds for 5 seconds
when there smart key is not in the vehi-
cle and the door is closed.
Always have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
If the smart key is
not in the vehicle
or is not detected
and you press the
engine start/ stop
button, the warn-
ing illuminates on
the LCD display
for 10 seconds.
OVI049160L
OVI049162L
ECSAFLS
SPORT
Features of your vehicle
704
Low key battery
If the engine start/
stop button turns
to the OFF posi-
tion when the
smart key in the
vehicle dis-
charges, the warn-
ing illuminates on
the LCD display
for 10 seconds.
Replace the battery with a new one. If it
is not possible, you can start the engine
by inserting the smart key into the smart
key holder then pressing the engine
start/stop button.
Press brake pedal to start engine
If the engine start/
stop button turn to
the ACC position
twice by pressing
the button repeat-
edly without
depressing the
brake pedal, the
warning illumi-
nates on the LCD
display for 10 seconds to indicate that
you should depress the brake pedal to
start the engine.
Shift to "P" position
If you try to turn off
the engine without
the shift lever in
the P (Park) posi-
tion, the engine
start/stop button
will turn to the
ACC position. If
the button is
pressed once
more it will turn to the ON position The
warning illuminates on the LCD display
for about 10 seconds to indicate that you
should press the engine start/stop button
with the shift lever in the P (Park) position
to turn off the engine.
Remove key
When you turn off
the engine with
the smart key in
the smart key
holder, the warn-
ing illuminates on
the LCD display
for 10 seconds.
Push the smart
key inward and
pull it out from the smart key holder.
Insert key
If you press the
engine start/stop
button while the
"Key is not detect-
ed" illuminates on
the LCD display,
the warning “Insert
key” illuminates for
10 seconds.
Press start button again
If there is a prob-
lem with the
engine start/stop
button system, the
warning illumi-
nates for 10 sec-
onds to indicate
that you could
start the engine by
pressing the
engine start/stop button while pressing
the brake pedal.
If the warning illuminates each time you
press the engine start/stop button, take
your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
OVI049161L
OVI049163L
OVI049164L
OVI049165L
OVI049166L
OVI049167L
471
Features of your vehicle
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
If you try to start
the engine with
the sift lever not in
P(Park) or
N(Neutral), the
warning illumi-
nates for 10 sec-
onds on the LCD
display.
You can also start
the engine with the shift lever in
N(Neutral), but for your safety start the
engine with the shift lever in P(Park).
Press start button while turn steering
If the steering
wheel does not
unlock normally
when the engine
start/stop button is
pressed, the warn-
ing illuminates for
10 seconds on the
LCD display.
Check steering wheel lock
If there is a mal-
function with the
steering wheel
lock, the warning
illuminates for 10
seconds on the
LCD display.
Take your vehicle
to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer
and have the system checked.
Check stop lamp fuse
When the stop
lamp fuse is dis-
connected, the
warning illumi-
nates for 10 sec-
onds on the LCD
display.
Replace the fuse
with a new one. If
that is not possible
you can start the engine by pressing the
engine start/stop button for 10 seconds
with the engine start/stop button in ACC.
OVI049168L
OVI049169L
OVI049170L
OVI049171L
Features of your vehicle
724
The parking assist system assists the
driver during movement of the vehicle by
chiming if any object is sensed within the
distance of 60 cm in front and 100 cm in
behind the vehicle. This system is a sup-
plemental system and it is not intended
to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limited.
Whenever moving the vehicle, pay as
much attention to what is in front of
behind you as you would in a vehicle
without a parking assist system.
Operation of the parking assist
system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when the
parking assist button is pressed with
the engine running.
• Sensing distance in backing up is
approximately 100 cm when you are
driving less than 10 km/h.
• Sensing distance in moving forward is
approximately 60 cm when you are
driving less than 10 km/h.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI049071
OVI049072
WARNING
The parking assist system should
only be considered as a supple-
mentary function. The driver must
check the front and rear view. The
operational function of the parking
assist system can be affected by
many factors and conditions of the
surroundings, so the responsibility
rests always with the driver.
OVI049073
Sensor
Front
Rear
Sensor
473
Features of your vehicle
• If you move the shift lever to the R
position with the engine start/stop but-
ton in the ON position and the parking
assist system in OFF, the parking
assist system will operate automatical-
ly. But it will turn off automatically,
when the vehicle speed exceeds than
20km/h.
✽
NOTICE
It may not operate if it’s distance from
the object is already less than approxi-
mately 25 cm when the system is ON.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 100 cm to 61 cm
from the rear bumper : Buzzer beeps
intermittently
• When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm from
the front or rear bumper : Buzzer
sounds two beeps intermittently
• When an object is within 30 cm of the
front or rear bumper : Buzzer sounds
continuously.
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not oper-
ate normally when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when moisture
melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter,
such as snow or water, or the sensor
cover is blocked. (It will operate nor-
mally when the material is removed or
the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Sensor is stained with foreign matter
such as snow or water. (Sensing range
will return to normal when removed.)
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces such
as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or
gradient.
2. Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes can inter-
fere with the sensor.
3. Heavy rain or water spray.
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5. Sensor is covered with snow.
Detecting range may decrease when:
1. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
2. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
and narrower than 14 cm in diameter.
The following objects may not be rec-
ognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sensor
frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
Features of your vehicle
744
✽
NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound sequen-
tially depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
2. The parking assist system may mal-
function if the vehicle bumper height
or sensor installation has been modi-
fied. Any non-factory installed equip-
ment or accessories may also interfere
with the sensor performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects less
than 30 cm from the sensor, or it may
sense an incorrect distance. Use with
caution.
4. When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow or water, the sensor may be
inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-
sor with any hard objects that could
damage the surface of the sensor.
Sensor damage could occur.
✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects with-
in the range and location of the sensors,
it can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, or objects located
between sensors may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently when shifting the shift lever into the
R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction in the rear parking assist sys-
tem. If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visual
inspection to make sure the vehicle
is clear of all obstructions before
moving the vehicle in any direction.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants related to a parking assist
system. Always drive safely and
cautiously.
475
Features of your vehicle
This function assists you when reverse
parking (back-in parking) or parallel park-
ing.
The parking guide system is only avail-
able when the vehicle speed is less than
10km/h.
(1) Reverse parking (Back-in parking)
(2) Parallel parking
(3) Top view
Reverse parking
(Back-in parking)
1. Drive the vehicle to a proper place to
park.
2. Stop the vehicle and shift the trans-
mission lever to the R position.
3. Select the reverse parking mode by
touching the icon on the screen.
4. The parking guide line (1) show on the
screen.
PARKING GUIDE SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
This is a supplementary system. It
is the responsibility of the driver to
always check the area around the
vehicle when parking the vehicle.
OVI049078 OVI049230L OVI049079L
Features of your vehicle
764
5. Turn the steering wheel so that the
parking guide line (1) is aligned with
the parking area.
6. Hold the steering wheel and carefully
back up the vehicle until the screen
changes.
7. Carefully back up the vehicle while fit-
ting the steering wheel guide line (2) to
the parking area by turning the steer-
ing wheel.
8. After parking, you can check the bot-
tom of the rear bumper by selecting
the icon "Top View" on the screen.
OVI049172
OVI049080L
OVI049173
OVI049081L
OVI049174L
477
Features of your vehicle
Parallel parking
1. Stop the vehicle at a distance of
approximately 1 meter (3 feet) parallel
to the parked vehicle (1) that is in front
of the desired parking space. Make
sure that the front of the parked vehi-
cle (1) is parallel to your rear wheel.
2. Stop the vehicle and shift the trans-
mission lever to the R position.
3. Select the parallel parking mode by
touching the icon on the
screen.
4. Back up carefully parallel to the parked
vehicle (1) until the vertical red guide
line (2) is at the end of the parked vehi-
cle (1).
5. Stop the vehicle.
6. With the vehicle at standstill, turn the
steering wheel to the direction of the
parking space. The guide lines will
blink.
7. Continue turning the steering wheel
until the guide lines stop blinking.
OVI049175
OVI049176L
OVI049177
Features of your vehicle
784
8. Hold the steering wheel and carefully
back up the vehicle until the green
guide line (1) is aligned with the target
parking line.
9. Stop the vehicle
10. With the vehicle at standstill, turn the
steering wheel to the opposite direc-
tion until the screen changes.
11. Carefully back up the vehicle by
referring to the steering wheel guide
line (2).
12. After parking, you can check the bot-
tom of the rear bumper by selecting
the icon "Top View" on the screen.
OVI049180L OVI049174L
OVI049178L
OVI049179
479
Features of your vehicle
FRONT BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Front blind spot monitoring system is a
supplemental system that shows blind
spot in front of the vehicle through the AV
monitor.
The front blind spot monitoring system
will operate when you press the button
and shift the shift lever into N(Neutral) or
D(Drive) while driving less then 10km/h.
✽
NOTICE
The front blind spot monitoring sys-
tem may not operate normally, when
you drive in the extremely high or low
temperature area.
(operating temperature: -20°C~65°C
(-4°F ~ 149°F))
WARNING
This is a supplementary system. It
is the responsibility of the driver to
always check the area around the
vehicle before driving because
there is a dead zone that can't be
seen through the camera.
Always keep the camera lens clean.
If the lens is covered with foreign
matter, the camera may not operate
normally.
OVI049074
OVI049074L
OVI041075
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
804
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the engine
start/stop button ON and the shift lever in
the R position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through
the AV monitor while backing-up.
✽
NOTICE
The rearview camera may not operate
normally, when you drive in the
extremely high or low temperature
area.
(operating temperature: -20°C~65°C
(-4°F ~ 149°F))
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the vehicle in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. This
causes all turn signal lights to blink. The
hazard warning lights will operate even
though engine start/stop button is in the
OFF position.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
WARNING
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to always
check the inside/outside rearview
mirror and the area behind the
vehicle before and while backing
up because there is a dead zone
that can't be seen through the
camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered with
foreign matter, the camera may
not operate normally.
OVI049086
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI049076
OVI049077
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
481
Features of your vehicle
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver turns off the engine and opens
the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the engine start/stop button is
turned to the OFF position, perform the
following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Headlight welcome function
(if equipped)
When the headlight is ON or AUTO posi-
tion and all doors (and trunk) are closed
and locked, if you press the door unlock
button on the smart key, the headlights
will come on for about 15 seconds. At this
time, if you press the door lock or unlock
button, the headlights will turn off imme-
diately.
Headlight escort function
(if equipped)
If you turn the engine start/stop button to
the ACC or OFF position with the head-
lights ON, the headlights (and/or tail
lights) remain on for about 20 minutes.
However, if the driver’s door is opened
and closed, the headlights are turned off
after 30 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the door lock button on the
smart key twice or turning the light switch
to the OFF or Auto position.
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position, the function can only operate at
night.
Rescue mode function
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has any problem on the
vehicle network system, the headlights
(low beam) turn on automatically with the
engine start/stop button in the ON posi-
tion even though the headlight switch is
not turned on. At this time, the emer-
gency lighting is not turned off when the
headlight switch is turned off.
LIGHTING
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except dri-
ver's door), the battery saver func-
tion does not operate and the head-
light escort function does not turn
off automatically. Therefore, it caus-
es the battery to be discharged. In
this case, make sure to turn off the
lamp before getting out of the vehi-
cle.
CAUTION
If the rescue mode occurs, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
Features of your vehicle
824
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the fol-
lowing positions:
(1) OFF (O) position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light /AFLS position
(if equipped)
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the parking
light position (1st position), the tail,
license and instrument panel lights will
turn ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position (2nd position), the head, tail,
license and instrument panel lights will
turn ON.
✽
NOTICE
The engine start/stop button must be in
the ON position to turn on the head-
lights.
OVI049089
OVI042089
Type A
Type B
OVI049090
OVI042090
Type A
Type B
OVI049091
OVI042091
Type A
Type B
483
Features of your vehicle
Auto light/AFLS position
(if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position while the engine is running, the
taillights and headlights will be turned
ON or OFF automatically depending on
the amount of light outside the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the adap-
tive front lighting system (AFLS), it will
also operate when the headlamp is ON.
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it back
for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time while the engine is not
running.
CAUTION
• Never place anything over the
sensor (1) located on the instru-
ment panel. This will ensure bet-
ter auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner. The cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto
light system may not work prop-
erly.
OVI049092
OVI042092
Type A
Type B
OVI049094
OVI042094
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
844
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
Turn signals and lane change sig-
nals
The engine start/stop button must be on
for the turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). The green arrow indicators on
the instrument panel indicate which turn
signal is operating. They will self-cancel
after a turn is completed.
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other dri-
ver's vision.
OVI049093
OVI042093
Type A
Type B
OVI049095
OVI042095
Type A
Type B
485
Features of your vehicle
If the indicator continues to flash after a
turn, manually return the lever to the OFF
(O) position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF (O)
position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
One-touch triple turn signal
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch triple turn signal
move the turn signal lever slightly for less
than 1.8 seconds and then release it. The
lane change signals will blink 3 times.
✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, a bulb may be burned out or
have a poor electrical connection in the
circuit.
Front fog light
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow etc. The fog lights will turn
on when the fog light switch (1) is turned
to the ON position after the parking light
is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch
to the OFF (O) position.
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
OVI049096
OVI042096
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
864
Rear fog light (if equipped)
To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the
headlight switch to the headlight position
and press the rear fog light switch (light
on the switch will illuminate).
The rear fog lights turn on when the rear
fog switch is pressed after the front fog
switch is turned to the ON position and
the headlight switch to the parklight posi-
tion. (if equipped)
To turn the rear fog lights off, press the
rear fog light switch again or turn the
headlight switch to the OFF (O) position.
✽
NOTICE
To turn on the rear fog light switch, the
engine start/stop button must be in the
ON position.
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make
it easier for others to see the front of your
vehicle during the day. DRL can be help-
ful in many different driving conditions,
and it is especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system will turn OFF when:
1. The parking light switch is ON.
2. Engine stops.
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
Automatic type
It is automatically adjusted the headlight
beam level according to the number of
the passengers and the loading weight in
the luggage area.
And it offers the proper headlight beam
under the various conditions.
OVI049218L
WARNING
If it is not working properly even
though your vehicle is inclined
backward according to passenger's
posture, or the headlight beam is
irradiated to the high or low posi-
tion, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Don't attempt to inspect or replace
the wiring yourself to prevent mal-
function.
487
Features of your vehicle
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses the
steering angle and vehicle speed, to
keep your field of vision wide by swiveling
and leveling the headlamp. Turn the knob
to the AUTO position when the engine is
running. The adaptive front lighting sys-
tem will operate when the headlamp is
ON. To turn off the AFLS, turn the knob to
the other position. After turning the AFLS
off, headlamp swiveling no longer occurs,
but leveling operates continuously.
If the AFLS malfunction indicator comes
on, the AFLS is not working properly.
Drive to the nearest safe location and
restart the engine. If the indicator contin-
uously remains on, take your vehicle to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the system checked.
D191100ABH
Headlight washer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the head-
light washer it will be operating at the
same time when you operate the wind-
shield washer. It will operate when the
headlight switch is in the first or second
position and the engine start/stop button
is in the ON position.
The washer fluid will be sprayed on to the
headlights.
✽
NOTICE
Check the headlight washers periodical-
ly to confirm that the washer fluid is
being sprayed properly onto the head-
light lenses.
OVI041088
OVI041261
OVI042261
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
884
Windshield wiper/washer
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST ( ) – Single wipe
· OFF (O) – Off
AUTO – Auto control wipe
· LO (1) – Low wiper speed
· HI (2) – High wiper speed
B : Auto control wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the engine
start/stop button is turned ON.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Type A
Type B
OVI049250L
OVI049251L
Type A
Type B
OVI049097
OVI049097L
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
489
Features of your vehicle
MIST( ) : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release it with the lever in
the OFF (O) position. The
wipers will operate continu-
ously if the lever is pushed
upward and held.
OFF (O) : Wiper is not in operation
AUTO : The rain sensor located on the
upper end of the windshield
glass senses the amount of rain-
fall and controls the wiping cycle
for the proper interval. The more
it rains, the faster the wiper oper-
ates. When the rain stops, the
wiper stops. To vary the speed
setting, turn the speed control
knob (1).
LO (1) : Normal wiper speed
HI (2) : Fast wiper speed
✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
✽
NOTICE
• When you operate the wipers, if your
vehicle has a problem in any part of
the wiper operation system, the wiper
may operate in the LO (1) mode
regardless of the wiper switch posi-
tion. In this case, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
• When the engine start/stop button is
turned to the OFF (O) position, the
wiper blade sometimes may move
slightly to be properly positioned for
reducing the deterioration of the
windshield wipers.
Auto control
The rain sensor located on the upper end
of the windshield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping
cycle for the proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper operates.
When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
Type A
Type B
OVI049098K
OVI049098L
R
R
a
a
i
i
n
n
s
s
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
R
R
a
a
i
i
n
n
s
s
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
Features of your vehicle
904
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob (1).
Set the wiper to OFF (O) position when
the wiper is not in use.
Windshield washers
In the OFF (O) position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer fluid
on the windshield and to run the wipers
1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
CAUTION
When the engine start/stop button
is in the ON position and the wind-
shield wiper switch is placed in the
AUTO mode, use caution in the fol-
lowing situations to avoid any
injury to the hands or other parts of
the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of the
windshield glass facing the rain
sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the
windshield glass with a damp or
wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the wind-
shield glass.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the OFF (O) position
to stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be dam-
aged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode while washing the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the pas-
senger side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in winter,
set the wiper switch in the OFF (O)
position. Otherwise, wipers may
operate and ice may damage the
windshield wiper blades. Always
remove all snow and ice and defrost
the windshield properly prior to
operating the windshield wipers.
Type A
Type B
OVI049099
OVI049099L
491
Features of your vehicle
The spray and wiper operation will con-
tinue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-
ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid
to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
the windshield and obscure your
vision.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
Features of your vehicle
924
Front
(1) Front map lamp
(2) Front room lamp
• : Press the button to turn the
map lamp on. This light pro-
duces a spot beam for conven-
ient use as a map lamp at
night or as a personal lamp for
the driver and the front pas-
senger. To turn the lamp off,
press the button again.
• DOOR : The front or rear room lamp
come on when the front or rear
door is opened regardless of
the engine start/stop button
position. When doors are
unlocked by the smart key, the
front and rear lamps come on
for approximately 15 seconds
as long as any door is not
opened. The front and rear
room lamps go out gradually
after approximately 15 sec-
onds if the door is closed.
However, if the engine
start/stop button is ON position
or all doors are locked, the
front and rear lamps will turn
off immediately.
If a door is opened with the
engine start/stop button in the
ACC or OFF position, the front
and rear lamps stay on for
about 20 minutes.
However, if a door is opened
with the engine start/stop but-
ton in the ON position, the
lamps stays on continuously.
•
ROOM
: Pressing the button, turns the
front and rear room lamps on.
To turn the lamps off, press the
ROOM button again.
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
OVI049100
Front
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
493
Features of your vehicle
Rear
(1) Rear map lamp
(2) Rear room lamp
• : Press the button to turn the
rear lamp on. To turn the lamp
off, press the button again.
•
ROOM
: Pressing the button, turns the
rear room lamps on. To turn
the lamps off, press the
ROOM button again.
Trunk room lamp
The trunk room lamp comes on when the
trunk is opened.
Door courtesy lamp
(if equipped)
The door courtesy lamp comes ON when
the door is opened to assist entering or
exiting the vehicle. It also serves as a
warning to passing vehicles that the vehi-
cle door is open.
OVI049102
CAUTION
Do not leave the lamp switches on
for an extended period of time when
the vehicle is not running.
OVI049101
Rear
CAUTION
The trunk room lamp comes on as
long as the trunk lid opens. To pre-
vent unnecessary charging system
drain, close the trunk lid securely
after using the trunk room.
OVI049103
Features of your vehicle
944
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
Vanity mirror lamp
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will
automatically turn on the mirror light.
Welcome light (if equipped)
If you approach the vehicle with the
smart key, the welcome light will illumi-
nate for 15 seconds.
If you open the driver's door and turn the
engine start/stop button to the ACC posi-
tion, the light will go out.
But, if you don't lock or unlock the doors
for 14 days after you lock the doors, the
light does not come on even though you
approach the vehicle with the smart key.
Press the button of the front outside door
handle or put your hand in the front out-
side door handle with the smart key. The
welcome light will illuminate.
OVI049104 OVI049105 OVI049182
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the glove box
securely after using the glove box.
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the vanity mir-
ror cover after using the mirror.
495
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this sec-
tion.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
rear window, while the engine is running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before oper-
ating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the out-
side rearview mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on the
rear window defroster.
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the front
wiper deicer, it will be operating at the
same time you operate the rear window
defroster.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
DEFROSTER
OVI049106
Features of your vehicle
964
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Climate information screen selection button
2. Driver’s temperature control button
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. Air intake control button / AQS (Air quality system)
button
5. Front windshield defrost button
6. Rear window defrost button
7. Fan speed control button
8. OFF button
9. Air conditioning button
10. Mode selection button
11. Passenger’s temperature control button
12. Dual temperature control selection button
OVI049107
497
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air condi-
tioning
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled auto-
matically by temperature setting.
2. Turn the temper-
ature knob to the
desired temper-
ature.
✽
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
press any button of the following.
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front wipers defroster button
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other functions
operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate con-
trol, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 22°C/71°F (23°C/73°F
- Except Europe).
✽
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
OVI049109
OVI049108
OVI049227L
OVI049224L
Front
Rear (Type A) (if equipped)
Rear (Type B) (if equipped)
OVI042114
Features of your vehicle
984
Manual heating and air condition-
ing
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pressing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this case,
the system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to con-
vert to full automatic control of the sys-
tem.
OVI049111
499
Features of your vehicle
❈
Rear outlet vents (F)
• The air flow of the Rear outlet vents is
controlled by the front climate control
system and delivered through the
inside air duct of the front doors. If the
door is open or not closed completely,
the air flow of the Rear outlet vent is
not delivered properly. Make sure the
front doors are closed completely.
• The air flow of the Rear outlet vents
may be weaker than the instrument
panel vents for the long air duct in the
front doors.
• Close the air vents in cold weather. The
air flow of the Rear outlet vents may
cool a little during heating operation.
(Use the Rear outlet vents during cool-
ing operation.)
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
Floor & Defrost
(A, C, D, E, F, G)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F, G)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side win-
dow defrosters.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F, G)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Face-Level (B, D, F, G)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
OVI049110
Features of your vehicle
1004
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the horizontal thumb-
wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to
the maximum position. To open the vent,
rotate it right to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
OVI049112 OVI049113
OVI049114
OVI049127L
OVI049225L
Driver
Rear (Type A) (if equipped)
Rear (Type B) (if equipped)
Front passenger
4101
Features of your vehicle
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the
right extremly. The temperature will
decrease to the minimum (Lo) by turning
the knob to the left extremly. When turn-
ing the knob, the temperature will
increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F. When
set to the lowest temperature setting, the
air conditioning will operate continuously.
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually. Also, if the passenger side
temperature control switch (PASS) is
operated, it will automatically change
to the DUAL mode as well.
2. Turn the left temperature control knob
to adjust the driver side temperature.
Turn the right temperature control
knob to adjust the passenger side tem-
perature.
When the driver side temperature is set
to the highest (HI) or lowest (Lo) temper-
ature setting, the DUAL mode is deacti-
vated for maximum heating or cooling.
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-
tivate DUAL mode. The passenger
side temperature will be set to the
same temperature as the driver side.
2. Turn the driver side temperature con-
trol knob. The driver and passenger
side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
Turn the temperature knob on the rear
seat armrest (if equipped). The passen-
ger side temperature will be set to the
same temperature as the driver side.
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the temperature mode dis-
play will reset to Centigrade.
This is a normal condition.You can switch
the temperature mode between
Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows;
While pressing the MODE button,
depress the DUAL button for 3 seconds
or more. The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
OVI049115
Features of your vehicle
1024
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled accord-
ing to the function selected.
✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
OVI049116
WARNING
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while driv-
ing.
4103
Features of your vehicle
Air quality control system
(if equipped)
The air inflow from outside the vehicle
can be automatically controlled. Press
the button to activate the air quality con-
trol system.
When using AQS mode, AQS(Air Quality
control System) automatically senses
outdoor air pollutants and minimizes
them from entering the vehicle, however,
unpleasant or foul odors that might be
present may still be noticeable within the
vehicle.
Exhaust gas cutoff mode :
Air enters the vehicle from the outside.
If exhaust gas enters the vehicle from the
outside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode is
automatically converted from the outside
air position to the recirculated air position
to prevent exhaust gas from entering the
vehicle.
✽
NOTICE
It should be noted that prolonged oper-
ation of the heating system in recircula-
tion mode will give rise to misting of the
windshield and side windows and the air
within the passenger compartment will
become stale. In addition, prolonged use
of the air conditioning with the recircu-
lation mode selected may result in the
air within the passenger compartment
becoming excessively dry.
Fan speed control
OVI049117
OVI049118
OVI049223L
OVI049226L
Front
Rear (Type A) (if equipped)
Rear (Type B) (if equipped)
CAUTION
If the windows fog up with the
Recirculation or A.Q.S mode select-
ed, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position or A.Q.S control
to OFF.
Features of your vehicle
1044
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by pressing the fan speed control
button.
To change the fan speed, press the right
of the button ( ) for higher speed, or
press the left of the button ( ) for lower
speed. To turn the fan speed control off,
press the OFF button.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air
climate control system. However, you can
still operate the mode and air intake but-
tons as long as the engine start/stop but-
ton is in the ON position.
OVI049119 OVI049120
4105
Features of your vehicle
Climate information screen selection
button
To change the screen into the climate
information screen, press the climate
information screen selection button.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the
or push the front defrost but-
ton (
).
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the car through the ventilation
system, temporarily set the air intake
control to the recirculated air position.
Be sure to return the control to the
fresh air position when the irritation
has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
OVI049200
Features of your vehicle
1064
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Press the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be run
with the windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehi-
cle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristics.
4107
Features of your vehicle
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter every 15,000 km
(10,000 miles) or once a year.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty or rough
roads, more frequent air conditioner
filter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
impact on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
It is important that the correct type and
amount of oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, damage to the compressor
and abnormal system operation may
occur.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service
may cause serious injury to the
person performing the service.
Features of your vehicle
1084
Rear vent
It will operate at the same time when you
operate the climate control system.
You can adjust the temperature by turn-
ing the temperature control knob. Turn
the knob to the red mark for warm air, or
to the blue mark for cool air.
Also, you can open or close the rear
vents as follows:
Type A
To close the vents, turn the ON/OFF
lever down. To open the vents, turn the
ON/OFF lever up.
Type B
To close the vents, press the ON/OFF
switch. To open the vents, press the
ON/OFF switch again.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever.
OVI049126
Type A
Type B
4109
Features of your vehicle
• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-
perature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, out-
side rear view mirrors, and all side win-
dows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up the
inside of the windshield.
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient tem-
perature and outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)
air position are not selected automatical-
ly, adjust the corresponding button man-
ually. If the position is selected,
lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher
fan speed.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The dif-
ference between the temperature of
the outside air and that of the wind-
shield could cause the outer sur-
face of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob
or button to the position and
fan speed control to the lower
speed.
OVI049121
Features of your vehicle
1104
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
(HI) position.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower fan
speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
Defogging logic
To reduce the possibility of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air intake
or air conditioning are controlled auto-
matically according to certain conditions
such as or position. To cancel or
return the defogging logic, do the follow-
ing.
1. Turn the engine start/stop button to the
ON position.
2. Press the defrost button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake con-
trol button at least 5 times within 3 sec-
onds.
The indicator of the air intake control but-
ton blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of
interval. It indicates that the defogging
logic is canceled or returned to the pro-
grammed status.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
OVI049122 OVI049123
4111
Features of your vehicle
Auto defogging system (if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the probability of
fogging up the inside of the windshield by
automatically sensing the moisture of
inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is on.
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture
of inside the windshield and
operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, the
higher steps operate as follow. For exam-
ple if auto defogging does not defog
inside the windshield at step 1 Outside
air position, it tries to defog again at step
2 Blowing air toward the windshield.
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Blowing air toward the wind-
shield
Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward the
windshield
Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 5 : Maximizing the air conditioning
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto
defogging system, it is automatically acti-
vated when the conditions are met.
However, if you would like to cancel the
auto defogging system, press the front
defroster button 4 times within 2 seconds
while pressing the AUTO button. The
indicator will blink 3 times to notify you
that the system is cancelled. To use the
auto defogging system again, follow the
procedures mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected or
discharged, it resets to the auto defog-
ging status.
✽
NOTICE
• If the A/C off or recirculated air posi-
tion is manually selected while the
auto defogging system is on, the auto
defogging indicator will blink 3 times
to give notice that manual operation is
canceled.
• If the air quality system (AQS) is
selected while the auto defogging sys-
tem is operating at the step 1 outside
air position, the recirculated air posi-
tion may operate when the outside air
is polluted.
OVI049124
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the pas-
senger side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
1124
Type A
When the engine start/stop button is in
the ON position, the clean air mode turns
on automatically.
• Clean air mode
The clean air mode deodorizes smells
and cleans the air.
Also, the clean air mode turns off auto-
matically, when the engine start/stop but-
ton is in the OFF position.
If the CLEAN indicator light does not illu-
minate when the engine start/stop button
is in the ON position, there may be a
problem with the clean air mode system.
Have the system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Type B
When the air conditioner or heater is on,
the clean air mode turns on automatical-
ly.
• Clean air mode
The clean air mode deodorizes smells
and cleans the air.
Also, the clean air mode turns off auto-
matically, when the air conditioner or
heater is turned off.
If the CLEAN indicator light does not illu-
minate when the air conditioner or heater
is on, there may be a problem with the
clean air mode system. Have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CLEAN AIR MODE (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI042125L
4113
Features of your vehicle
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or passengers.
Center console storage
To open the center console storage, push
the button (1) (if equipped) or pull up the
lever (2).
Rear tower console storage
(if equipped)
To open the upper console storage, press
the button (2) and to open the lower con-
sole storage, press the button (1). Close
the tower console storage after use.
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flamma-
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-
cle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
WARNING
• To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the tower console storage
closed while driving.
• Close this lower and upper lid
while the vehicle is moving.
Failure to observe this instruc-
tion could cause death or serious
injury.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover cannot close
securely.
OVI049183 OVI039030
Features of your vehicle
1144
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with the mechanical key of the
smart key (1).
To open the glove box, press the button
(2) and the glove box will automatically
open (3). Close the glove box after use.
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses with the lenses
facing out. To close the sunglass holder,
push it up.
OVI049129OVI049128
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove box
for a long time.
4115
Features of your vehicle
Cool box (if equipped)
To open the cool box, pull up the lever(1).
To keep the drink cool, put the drink in
the cool box and press the ON/OFF but-
ton(2) with the engine start/stop button in
the ON position. The indicator on the but-
ton illuminates.
There are partitions in the cool box to fix
the drink. You can remove the partitions
to fit bigger size bottles. Be careful not to
damage the partitions.
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass hold-
er. Such objects can be thrown
from the holder in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident, pos-
sibly injuring the passengers in
the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder
while the vehicle is moving. The
rear view mirror of the vehicle
can be blocked by an opened
sunglass holder.
WARNING
The cool box repair should be done
in an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Inappropriate repair causes dam-
age resulting in a fire and injury.
OVI049187
OVI049188
Features of your vehicle
1164
OVI049189
OVI049190
CAUTION
There is the air inlet at the center of
the rear seat and the air outlet at the
inside of the trunk. If the air inlet is
closed up, the efficiency of the cool
box will be lower. If the air inlet is
closed up for a long time, the cool
box may be damaged.
Do not let the air inlet and outlet be
closed up.
CAUTION
• If the drink temperature is high, it
takes long time to cool the drink.
To use the cool box efficiently, put
a cool drink in the cool box.
• If the cool box cover does not
close securely, the efficiency will
be low and frost will occur.
Always close the cover securely.
• If you attempt to close the cover
by force when drinks are not put
in the cool box correctly, it will
damage the cover.
• Because the temperature of the
cool box bottom is very low, be
sure frost does not occur on the
drink.
• Put the cap on the bottle securely
when you put the bottle in the
cool box.
• Do not put sharp or any other
object except drinks in the cool
box. It will damage the cool box.
• If you keep food in the cool box
for a long time, the food may get
spoiled and smells.
• When you clean the inside of the
cool box, use a soft cloth. Don't
use strong soap, chemical deter-
gents.
4117
Features of your vehicle
Cigarette lighter
For the cigarette lighter to work, the
engine start/stop button must be in the
ACC position or the ON position.
To open the cover, press the cover for-
ward.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element
has heated, the lighter will pop out to the
“ready” position.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette
lighter, use only a genuine HYUNDAI
replacement or its approved equivalent.
Ashtray
Front
To open the cover, press the cover and it
will slowly open. To clean the ashtray, the
plastic receptacle should be removed by
lifting the plastic ashtray receptacle
upward and pulling it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
CAUTION
Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter
should be used in the cigarette
lighter socket. The use of plug-in
accessories (shavers, hand-held
vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may
damage the socket or cause electri-
cal failure.
WARNING
• Do not hold the lighter in after it
is already heated because it will
overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
OVI049130
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
OVI049131
Features of your vehicle
1184
Rear (if equipped)
Use the rear ashtray after spreading the
cover (1).
To clean the ashtray, the plastic recepta-
cle should be removed by lifting the plas-
tic ashtray receptacle upward and pulling
it out.
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
OVI049132
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you may burn your-
self. Such a burn to the driver
could lead to loss of control of
the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of a personal
injury in the event of a sudden
stop or collision, do not place
uncovered or unsecured bottles,
glasses, cans, etc., in the cup
holder while the vehicle is in
motion.
OVI049133
OVI049134
OVI049192
Front
Rear (A) (if equipped)
Rear (B) (if equipped)
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of direct
sun light and do not put them in a
vehicle that is heated up. It may
explode.
4119
Features of your vehicle
Front
To open the cover, press the cover and it
will slowly open.
Rear (A)
To open the cover, press the button and
it will slowly open.
Rear (B) (if equipped)
To open the cover, press the cover and it
will slowly open.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or
backward (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold-
ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
OVI049201
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor to
its original position after use. If the
vanity mirror is not closed securely,
the lamp will stay on and could
result in battery discharge and pos-
sible sunvisor damage.
WARNING
For your safety, do not obstruct your
vision when using the sunvisor.
Features of your vehicle
1204
Rear mirror (if equipped)
To use the rear mirror, press the cover
and it will slowly open and the mirror
lamp will turn on.
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
OVI049141
CAUTION
Close the mirror cover securely. If
the mirror cover is not closed, the
lamp will stay on and could result in
battery discharge and possible mir-
ror damage.
OVI049185
OVI049136
OVI049186
Front
Rear (A) (if equipped)
Rear (B) (if equipped)
CAUTION
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and remove
the accessory plug after use.
Using the accessory plug for pro-
longed periods of time with the
engine off could cause the bat-
tery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in elec-
tric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
4121
Features of your vehicle
Clock
Whenever the battery terminals or relat-
ed fuses are disconnected, you must
reset the time.
When the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC or ON position, the clock but-
tons operate as follows:
Each time you press the button (1) (or
(2)), the clock will be set back (or for-
ward) by one minute. Pressing the button
(1) (or (2))and holding it, will set the clock
back(or forward) continuously. Release
the button at the time you want.
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while driving.
You may lose your steering control
and cause an accident that results in
severe personal injury or death.
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-
ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get an electric shock.
OVI049137
Features of your vehicle
1224
Outside thermometer
The current outside temperature is dis-
played in 1°C (1°F) increments. The tem-
perature range is between -30°C ~ 60°C
(-30°F~140°F).
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the temperature mode dis-
play will reset to Centigrade.
This is a normal condition.You can switch
the temperature mode between
Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows;
While pressing the MODE button,
depress the DUAL button for 3 seconds
or more. The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
The outside temperature on the display
may not change immediately like a gen-
eral thermometer to prevent the driver
from being inattentive.
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
OVI049140
OVI049239L
OVI049138L
Type A
Type B
4123
Features of your vehicle
Bag hanger (if equipped)
Pull the strap (1) to hang a bag on the
hook (2).
When you are not use the hook, fold the
hook.
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
OVI049212
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to
the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side
floor mat anchors that are designed
to securely hold the floor mat in
place. To avoid any interference
with pedal operation, HYUNDAI rec-
ommends that only the HYUNDAI
floor mat designed for use in your
vehicle be installed.
OXM040228
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
1244
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the holders located in
the cargo area to attach the luggage net.
Rear curtain (if equipped)
To fold the rear curtain, press the button.
To unfold the rear curtain, press the but-
ton again.
The rear curtain will be folded automati-
cally when you shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) and unfolded automatically
when you shift the shift lever from R
(Reverse) into P (Park).
OVI049252L
OVI049143
Front (Type B)
Front (Type A)
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky
objects in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net, ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of the
luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT
use when the strap has visible
signs of wear or damage.
OVI049191
4125
Features of your vehicle
After the rear curtain is folded by shifting
the shift lever into R (Reverse), if you
drive more than 20km/h with the shift
lever in D (Drive), the rear curtain will be
unfolded automatically.
Massage seat - rear right seat
(if equipped)
OVI049144
OVI049217
Rear Type B (if equipped)
Rear Type A (if equipped)
CAUTION
Do not pull or fold the rear curtain
by hand. It could cause motor fail-
ure.
OVI049204
Massage seat remote control
Features of your vehicle
1264
You can operate the massage seat by
using the remote control with the engine
start/stop button in the ON position.
When you use the remote control to
operate the massage seat, press the
switch on the remote control to the
receiver at the front passenger's seat
back.
1. ON/OFF button
Turns the massage system on/off when
the engine is running.
2. MODE 1
Operates the massage system as follow:
3. MODE 2
Operates the massage system as follow:
4. UPPER BACK
Operates the massage system with the
upper part of the seat back.
5. LOWER BACK
Operates the massage system with the
middle and lower part of the seat back.
6. FORCE
Regulates the massage force 1 to 3
steps.
7. SPEED
Regulates the massage speed 1 to 3
steps.
8. VIB. (Vibrator)
Turns on the vibrator of the seat back.
9. VIB. SPEED
Regulates the vibrator speed 1 to 3 steps
when the VIB. button is pressed.
OVI049206
→ → → →
← ← ← ←
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
→ → → →
← ← ← ←
4 1 3 2
4 1 3 2
OVI049205
4127
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
When you operate the massage system
by pressing the remote control button,
the massage seat operates for 15 min-
utes. If you want to operate the massage
seat longer, press the remote control
button again.
CAUTION
• Do not damage the seat back with
sharp objects. The air hose and
air tube may be damaged.
• If the massage seat or vibrator
does not operate normally, have
the system inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
Features of your vehicle
1284
✽
NOTICE
If you install an aftermarket HID head-
lamp, your vehicle’s audio and electron-
ic device may malfunction.
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB
(universal serial bus) port or iPod
®
port,
you can use an aux port to connect audio
devices a USB port to plug in a USB, and
an iPod
®
port to plug in an iPod
®
.
✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Navigation system (if equipped)
The navigation system ascertains the
present position of your vehicle by using
information from satellites and guides
you to the place you assign as the desti-
nation.
Detailed information for the navigation
system is described in a separately sup-
plied manual.
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OVI049184
OVI049152
4129
Features of your vehicle
DIS (Driver Information System)
(if equipped)
Informations for DIS are described in the
DIS manual supplied separately.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free (if equipped)
You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Detailed information for the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free is
described in the manual supplied sepa-
rately.
INFO (if equipped)
You can check the state of the vehicle
and set several functions through the
monitor.
To open the info main menu, press the
INFO button on the central control panel.
Detailed information for the info main
menu is described in a separately sup-
plied manual.
Glass antenna (if equipped)
When the radio power switch is turned on
while the ignition switch is in either the
“ON” or “ACC” position, your car will
receive both AM and FM broadcast sig-
nals through the antenna in the rear win-
dow glass.
OVI049148L OVI049149
Features of your vehicle
1304
Steering wheel audio control
The steering wheel audio control button
is installed to promote safe driving.
VOLUME (VOL / ) (1)
• Press the up button ( ) to increase
volume.
• Press the down button ( ) to
decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed
for 0.8 second or more, it will work as fol-
lows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button. It will SEEK until you release the
button.
DVDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
DVDC mode
It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN
button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed
for less than 0.8 second, it will work as
follows in each mode.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote con-
trol buttons simultaneously.
OVI049150L
OVI049151L
Type B
Type A
CAUTION
• Do not clean the inside of the rear
window glass with a cleaner or
use a scraper to remove foreign
deposits as this may cause dam-
age to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can disturb receiving AM and FM
broadcast signals.
4131
Features of your vehicle
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
DVDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
DVDC mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is included in the following pages
in this section.
MODE (3)
Press the MODE button to select Radio,
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) or DVDC
(Digital Versatile Disc Changer) or AUX.
MUTE (4)
• Press the MUTE button to cancel the
sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to acti-
vate the sound.
✽
NOTICE
Detailed information is described in a
separately supplied manual.
5
Before driving / 5-3
Engine start/stop button / 5-4
Starting the engine / 5-6
Automatic transmission / 5-8
Brake system / 5-14
Electronic controlled suspension (ECS) / 5-28
Cruise control system / 5-32
Smart cruise control system / 5-36
Lane departure warning system / 5-46
Intelligent accelerator pedal / 5-49
Vehicle stability management (VSM) / 5-50
Economical operation / 5-54
Special driving conditions / 5-56
Winter driving / 5-60
Vehicle weight / 5-64
Trailer towing / 5-65
Driving your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
25
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-
dows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-
tion.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear
a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the
exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your
garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are
kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
53
Driving your vehicle
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in sec-
tion 7, “Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the engine start/stop button is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are famil-
iar with your vehicle and its equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people,
especially children, before putting a
vehicle into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment. Driving
while under the influence of drugs
is as dangerous or more dangerous
than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-
er who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
a loss of vehicle control, that may
lead to an accident, severe personal
injury, and death.The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and legal
operation of a vehicle, and use of any
handheld devices, other equipment,
or vehicle systems which take the
driver’s eyes, attention and focus
away from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used during
operation of the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
45
Illuminated engine start/stop but-
ton
Whenever the front door is opened, the
engine start/stop button will illuminate for
your convenience. The light will go off
after about 30 seconds when the door is
closed.
Engine start/stop button position
OFF
To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-
tion) or vehicle power (ON position),
press the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in P(Park). When you press
the engine start/stop button without the
shift lever in P(Park), the engine
start/stop button does not turn to the
OFF position but to the ACC position.
If you turn the engine start/stop button off
and remove the smart key from the smart
key holder, the steering wheel will lock.
If you turn the engine start/stop button off
when the smart key isn't in the smart key
holder and open the driver's door, the
steering wheel will lock.
✽
NOTICE
• If difficulty is experienced turning the
engine start/stop button to the ACC
position, turn the steering wheel right
and left to release the tension while
pressing the engine start/stop button.
• When you turn off the engine, the
vehicle should be stopped.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
OVI059001
WARNING
• When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Keep all things in the vehicle
safely stored.
• If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be care-
ful when operating what may dis-
turb driving such as audio or
heater. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive safely.
55
Driving your vehicle
ACC(Accessory)
Press the engine start/stop button when
it is in the OFF position without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-
trical accessories are operational.
If the engine start/stop button is in the
ACC position for more than 1 hour, the
button is off automatically to prevent the
battery discharge.
ON
Press the engine start/stop button while it
is in the ACC position without depressing
the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
Do not leave the engine start/stop button
in the ON position for a long time. The
battery may discharge, because the
engine is not running.
START
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P(Park)
or the N(Neutral) position. For your safe-
ty, start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
✽
NOTICE
• If you press the engine start/stop but-
ton without depressing the brake
pedal, the engine will not start and the
engine start/stop button changes as
follow :
OFF
→
ACC
→
ON
→
OFF
• If you leave the engine start/stop but-
ton in the ACC or the ON position for
a long time, the battery will discharge.
WARNING
• Never press the engine start/stop
button while the vehicle is in
motion. This would result in the
engine turning off and loss of
power assist for the steering and
brakes, which may lead to loss of
directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the
driver’s seat, always make sure
the shift lever is engaged in P
(Park),
set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the engine
start/stop button, or any other
controls through the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area could
cause a loss of vehicle control,
an accident and serious bodily
injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING
You are able to turn off the engine
(START/RUN) or vehicle power
(ON), only when the vehicle is not in
motion. In an emergency situation
while the vehicle is in motion, you
are able to turn the engine off and
to the ACC position by pressing the
engine start/stop button for more
than 2 seconds or 3 times succes-
sively within 3 seconds. If the vehi-
cle is still moving, you can restart
the engine without depressing the
brake pedal by pressing the engine
start/stop button with the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position.
Driving your vehicle
65
1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
3. Place the shift lever in the P(Park)
position.
4. Press the engine start/stop button
while depressing the brake pedal.
5. In extremely cold weather (below -
18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has not
been operated for several days, let the
engine warm up without depressing
the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
if it is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
• When the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC or above, if any door is
opened, the system checks for the
smart key. If the smart key is not in the
vehicle, the warning, "Key not in vehi-
cle" will illuminate on the LCD display.
And if all doors are closed, the chime
will sound for about 5 seconds. The
indicator will turn off while the vehicle
is moving. Keep the smart key in the
vehicle, when using the ACC position
or if the vehicle engine is on.
STARTING THE ENGINE
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and acceler-
ator pedal.
(Continued)
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an
accident.
57
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start
the engine by inserting the smart key
into the smart key holder. To eject the
smart key from the smart key holder,
press the smart key inward passed the
detent and then pull the key outward.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you
can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
you are not able to replace the fuse,
you can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button for 10 sec-
onds with the engine start/stop button
in the ACC. The engine can start with-
out depressing the brake pedal. But
for your safety always depress the
brake pedal before starting the
engine.
OVI059002
CAUTION
• Do not press the engine
start/stop button for more than 5
seconds except when the stop
lamp fuse is blown.
• When you eject the smart key
from the smart key holder, press
the smart key inward and pull it
out. If you pull out the smart key
forcibly without pushing the
smart key, the smart key holder
may be damaged and couldn’t
operate normally.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when the
smart key is in the vehicle. Never
allow children or any person who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch
the engine start/stop button or
related parts.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the
N(Neutral) position while the vehi-
cle is still moving and press the
engine start/stop button in an
attempt to restart the engine.
Driving your vehicle
85
Automatic transmission operation
The automatic transmission has 8 for-
ward speeds and one reverse speed. The
individual speeds are selected automati-
cally, depending on the position of the
shift lever.
✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transmission Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
OVI059004
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
The selector lever can be shifted freely.
Depress the brake pedal when shifting. (If your vehicle is installed shift lock system)
59
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster
displays the shift lever position when the
engine start/stop button is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transmission and prevents the drive
wheels from rotating.
WARNING - Automatic
transmission
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting the shift lever into D
(Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order iden-
tified.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your trans-
mission, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on an incline, do
not hold the vehicle with the
engine power. Use the service
brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
CAUTION
The transmission may be damaged
if you shift into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion.
Driving your vehicle
105
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion. The transmission will automatically
shift through a 8-gear sequence, provid-
ing the best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the trans-
mission will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
✽
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into D (Drive).
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a
manual transmission, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking the
vehicle” explained in this section.
OVI059005
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Sports mode
511
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 8 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-
ated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the trans-
mission to shift into the 2nd (or 3rd)
gear which is better for smooth driv-
ing on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the -(down) side to shift back
to the 1st gear.
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic transmis-
sion has a shift lock system which pre-
vents shifting the transmission out of P
(Park) unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
To shift the transmission from P (Park) or
N (Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering
the shift-lock access hole.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
access hole and press down on the
key (or screwdriver).
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer immedi-
ately.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the
vehicle.
OVI051006N
Driving your vehicle
125
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-
tion with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park)
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
vehicle in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transmission in
P (Park) to keep the vehicle from mov-
ing.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Lossing control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
513
Driving your vehicle
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive) and release
the parking brake. Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the service
brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-
dency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will
help prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
Driving your vehicle
145
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you nor-
mally would. The stopping distance, how-
ever, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when neces-
sary to maintain steering control on slip-
pery surfaces.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
(Continued)
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-
cle’s ability to safely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
• Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you don't check
the position of the accelerator
and brake pedal before driving,
you may depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It may
cause a serious accident.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake tem-
peratures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
(Continued)
515
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a high-
pitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
Electric parking brake (EPB)
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the brake pedal and then pull the EPB
switch. Make sure that the brake warning
light comes on.
Releasing the parking brake
The parking brake will be released auto-
matically when you shift the shift lever
from P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral)
or D (Drive) while depressing the brake
pedal.
To release the parking brake manually
with the engine start/stop button in the
ON position, press the EPB switch while
depressing the brake pedal. Make sure
that the brake warning light goes off.
If the parking brake does not release,
have the system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
- Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace brake pads as
complete front or rear axle sets.
CAUTION
Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation. It could
damage the vehicle system and
make endanger driving safety.
OVI052008 OVI052009
Driving your vehicle
165
✽
NOTICE
• For your safety, you can engage the
EPB even though the engine start/stop
button is in the OFF position, but you
cannot release it.
• For your safety, press the brake pedal
and release the parking brake manu-
ally with EPB switch when you drive
downhill or back up the vehicle.
OVI059010L
WARNING
If you depress the accelerator pedal
with EPB engaged, the warning will
sound and message will appear. Do
not apply the accelerator pedal
while the parking brake is engaged.
Damage to the parking brake may
occur.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the shift
lever in place of the parking
brake. Set the parking brake and
make sure the shift lever is
securely positioned in P (Park).
• Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the EPB switch. If the EPB is
released unintentionally, serious
injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehcile
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
517
Driving your vehicle
Check the brake warning light by turning
the engine start/stop button ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be illumi-
nated when the parking brake is applied
with the engine start/stop button in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released while
the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction in the brake system.
Immediate attention is necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-
cle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-
tion.
EPB malfunction indicator
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is turned to the
ON position and goes off in approximate-
ly 3 seconds if the system is operation
normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator remains
on, comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the engine start/stop but-
ton is turned to the ON position, this indi-
cates that the EPB may have malfunc-
tioned.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
The EPB malfunction indicator may illu-
minate when the ESP indicator comes on
to indicate that the ESP is not working
properly, but it does not indicate a mal-
function of the EPB.
W-75 OVI059011
CAUTION
• A click sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB.
These conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is function-
ing properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet,
make sure to inform him/her how
to operate the EPB.
Driving your vehicle
185
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake pedal
while driving, emergency braking is pos-
sible by pulling the EPB switch. Braking
is possible only when you pull the EPB
switch.
✽
NOTICE
During emergency braking by the EPB,
the parking brake warning light will
illuminate to indicate that the system is
operating.
EPB emergency release
If the EPB does not release properly, do
as follows:
1. Shift the shift lever into P (Park).
2. Install the blocks to the wheels to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling.
3. Open the trunk and remove the cover.
4. Remove the emergency release han-
dle from the tool case.
5. Remove the emergency release cable
cover.
6. Install the emergency release handle
into the threaded end of the emer-
gency release cable by turning it clock-
wise.
7. Pull up the handle until a sound is
heard and the EPB warning light
blinks.
8. After using the EPB emergency
release, the warning message will
come on. You should operate the EPB
switch for the vehicle to return to its
normal condition. If the vehicle does
not return to normal condition, take
your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
OBH058058
WARNING
Do not use the EPB emergency
release except in an emergency sit-
uation. It is very dangerous to drive
with the EPB emergency release.
OVI052068L
WARNING
Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation.
519
Driving your vehicle
AUTO HOLD
The AUTO HOLD feature keeps the
brake applied when the shift lever is in D,
R or N with the feature enabled and the
brake pedal has been depressed to stop
the vehicle.
Set up
1. Press the AUTO HOLD switch. The
AUTO HOLD indicator will illuminate
white and the system will be in the
standby position.
2. When you stop the vehicle completely
by pressing the brake pedal, the AUTO
HOLD maintains the brake pressure in
order to hold the vehicle stationary.
The indicator changes from white to
green.
3. The brake will remain engaged even if
the brake pedal is not depressed.
4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
Leaving
If you press the accelerator pedal with
the transmission in R (Reverse), D
(Drive) or sports mode, the AUTO HOLD
will be released automatically and the
vehicle will start to move. The indicator
changes from green to white.
OVI059018
WARNING
When driving off from AUTO HOLD
by applying accelerator pedal,
always check the surrounding area
near your vehicle.
Slowly press the accelerator pedal
for a smooth launch.
OVI059019OVI059017
Driving your vehicle
205
Cancel
To cancel the AUTO HOLD operation,
press the AUTO HOLD switch. The AUTO
HOLD indicator will go out.
✽
NOTICE
• The AUTO HOLD does not operate
when;
- the driver’s door is open.
- the shift lever is in P (Park).
• The AUTO HOLD automatically
switches to EPB when
- the hood is open with shift lever in D
(Drive).
- the trunk lid is open with shift lever
in R (Reverse).
- the driver's seat belt is unbuckled
and the driver's door is open.
- AUTO HOLD is operating for a long
period of time.
- the vehicle is standing on a steep
slope.
(Continued)
(Continued)
In these cases, the brake warning light
comes on, the AUTO HOLD indicator
changes from green to white, and a
warning sounds and a message will
appear to inform you that EPB has
been automatically engaged.
Before driving again, depress the
brake pedal, check the area around
the vehicle and release the EPB
switch.
• When AUTO HOLD is ON and the
vehicle comes to a stop on a steep
slope (about 25% gradient or more),
the EPB will be automatically
engaged. In this case, when you
release the EPB by pressing the EPB
switch with the brake pedal
depressed, the AUTO HOLD will hold
the vehicle for 3 seconds in order to
prevent the vehicle from rolling back
during starts.
• While operating Auto Hold, you may
hear mechanical noise. However, it is
normal operating noise.
OVI059070LOVI059020
521
Driving your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-
lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa-
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situa-
tion allow the ABS to control the force
being delivered to the brakes.
WARNING
ABS (or ESP) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or danger-
ous driving maneuvers. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for vehicle
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (or Electronic Stability
Program system) may be longer
than for those without it in the fol-
lowing road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tire chains installed.
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESP) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
CAUTION
If there is a malfunction with the dri-
ver’s door, hood or trunk open
detection system, the AUTO HOLD
may not work properly.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
WARNING
• Press the accelerator pedal slow-
ly when you start the vehicle.
• For your safety, cancel the AUTO
HOLD when you drive downhill or
back up the vehicle or park the
vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
225
✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from exces-
sive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis-
tance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of low bat-
tery voltage. It does not mean your ABS
has malfunctioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, howev-
er, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and have operated your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be
active continuously and the ABS
warning light may illuminate. Pull
your vehicle over to a safe place
and stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with the ABS. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
523
Driving your vehicle
Electronic stability program (ESP)
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
system is designed to stabilize the
vehicle during cornering maneuvers.
ESP checks where you are steering and
where the vehicle is actually going. ESP
applies the brakes at individual wheels
and intervenes in the engine
management system to stabilize the
vehicle.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESP will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESP is active.
✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic Stability
Program System is functioning proper-
ly.
WARNING
Never drive too fast according to
the road conditions or too quickly
when cornering. Electronic stability
program (ESP) will not prevent acci-
dents. Excessive speed in turns,
abrupt maneuvers and hydroplan-
ing on wet surfaces can still result
in serious accidents. Only a safe
and attentive driver can prevent
accidents by avoiding maneuvers
that cause the vehicle to lose trac-
tion. Even with ESP installed,
always follow all the normal precau-
tions for driving - including driving
at safe speeds for the conditions.
OVI059021
Driving your vehicle
245
ESP operation
ESP ON condition
• When the engine start/stop
button is turned ON, ESP and
ESP OFF indicator lights illu-
minate for approximately 3
seconds, then ESP is turned
on.
• Press the ESP OFF button for
at least half a second after
turning the engine start/stop
button ON to turn ESP off.
(ESP OFF indicator will illumi-
nate). To turn the ESP on,
press the ESP OFF button
(ESP OFF indicator light will
go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESP per-
forming an automatic system
self-check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESP is in operation,
ESP indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Program is operating proper-
ly, you can feel a slight pulsa-
tion in the vehicle. This is only
the effect of brake control and
indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, the engine
rpm (revolution per minute)
may not be increased even if
you press the accelerator
pedal deeply. This is to main-
tain the stability and traction
of the vehicle and does not
indicate a problem.
ESP operation off
ESP OFF state
• To cancel ESP operation,
press the ESP OFF button for
more than 0.5 second. (ESP
OFF indicator light illumi-
nates).
• If the engine stops when ESP
is off, ESP remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESP will be automatically
turned on again.
Indicator light
When the engine start/stop button is
turned ON, the indicator light illuminates,
then goes off if ESP system is operating
normally.
The ESP indicator light blinks whenever
ESP is operating.
The ESP OFF indicator light comes on
when either the ESP is turned off with the
button.
-
■ ESP indicator light (blinks)
■ ESP OFF indicator light (comes on)
525
Driving your vehicle
Warning light
If this warning light illuminates, your vehi-
cle may have a malfunction with the ESP
system. When this warning light illumi-
nates, EPB and SCC warning light may
also illuminate at the same time.
Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
ESP OFF usage
When driving
• ESP should be turned on for daily driv-
ing whenever possible.
• To turn ESP off while driving, press the
ESP OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESP is
turned off (ESP OFF light illuminat-
ed). If the ESP is left on, it may pre-
vent the vehicle speed from increas-
ing, and result in false diagnosis.
• Turning the ESP off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESP system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Program
system is only a driving aid; use
precautions for safe driving by
slowing down on curved, snowy, or
icy roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESP indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
WARNING
Never press the ESP OFF button
while ESP is operating (ESP indica-
tor light blinks).
If ESP is turned off while ESP is
operating, the vehicle may slip out
of control.
■ ESP warning light (comes on)
Driving your vehicle
265
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake is
not engaged and that the parking
brake indicator light is out before driv-
ing away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your car will
not stop as quickly if the brakes are
wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle
to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the car
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and call
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
WARNING
Never press the ESP OFF button
while ESP is operating.
If the ESP is turned off while ESP is
operating, the vehicle may go out of
control.
To turn ESP off while driving, press
the ESP OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
WARNING
• Whenever leaving vehicle or
parking, always set the parking
brake and fully engage the vehi-
cle's transmission into the P
(Park) position. Vehicles not fully
engaged in park with the parking
brake set are at risk for moving
inadvertently and injuring your-
self or others.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
527
Driving your vehicle
• Don't coast down hills with the vehicle
out of gear. This is extremely haz-
ardous. Keep the car in gear at all
times, use the brakes to slow down,
then shift to a lower gear so that
engine braking will help you maintain a
safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driv-
ing can be dangerous because it can
result in the brakes overheating and
losing their effectiveness. It also
increases the wear of the brake com-
ponents.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
car pointed straight ahead while you
slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transmission, don't let your
car creep forward. To avoid creeping
forward, keep your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when the car is stopped.
• Be caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P. If your vehicle
is facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the curb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away from
the curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep
the vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi-
tion. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the shift lever
in P and block the rear wheels so the
car cannot roll. Then release the park-
ing brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transmission to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
Driving your vehicle
285
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED SUSPENSION (ECS) (IF EQUIPPED)
ECS controls the vehicle suspension
automatically to maximize passenger
comfort by using the air spring in the sus-
pension.
You can also control the vehicle suspen-
sion manually in SPORT mode, NOR-
MAL mode, or HIGH mode.
To select the SPORT mode
Push the SPORT button to select the
SPORT mode that provides a tighter sus-
pension and firmer ride. And also, it
enables you to operate the shift pattern
and steering wheel more actively. The
SPORT indicator will illuminate.
The SPORT mode is used for sporty driv-
ing such as driving on winding, moun-
tainous roads or high speed driving.
Push the SPORT button again to return
to NORMAL mode that provides a softer
ride. The SPORT indicator will go off.
OVI051022
OVI052022L
Type B
Type A
OVI051080N
529
Driving your vehicle
To control the vehicle height
Push the vehicle height control button to
select the HIGH mode that makes the
vehicle height be higher than the NOR-
MAL mode and the indicator light on the
vehicle height control button will illumi-
nate. It is useful in a rough road.
✽
NOTICE
When you drive over 70km/h, you can
not select the HIGH mode. If the vehicle
speed exceeds 70km/h while driving in
the HIGH mode, the NORMAL mode
will be selected automatically.
Push the vehicle height control button
again to select the NORMAL mode that
makes the vehicle height lower than the
HIGH mode. The indicator light in the
vehicle height control button will go off.
✽
NOTICE
• When the vehicle stops with the shift
lever in D(Drive) or R(Reverse), you
can not change the vehicle height.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 120km/h
while driving in NORMAL mode, the
LOW mode that is lower than NOR-
MAL mode is selected automatically.
LOW mode can not be selected manu-
ally.
• Do not operate ECS when the air filter
of the compressor in the lower part of
the vehicle sinks under the water.
Indraft of water into the compressor
may happen, and ECS may not oper-
ate normally.
• Make sure there are no objects under
the vehicle before changing the vehicle
height.
• A click sound may be heard while
operating ECS, but these conditions
are normal and indicate that ECS is
functioning properly.
• Depending on the outside tempera-
ture the vehicle height may be differ-
ent.
• Do not press the engine start/stop but-
ton to the other position while operat-
ing ECS. This could cause damage to
ECS.
OVI059023
OVI059023L
Type B
Type A
Driving your vehicle
305
ECS (Electronic Controlled
Suspension) Malfunction indicator
The ECS malfunction indicator will illumi-
nate when the engine start/stop button is
turned to the ON position, but should go
off after approximately 3 seconds. If the
warning light does not come on, or con-
tinuously remains on after coming on for
about 3 seconds when you turn the
engine start/stop button to the ON posi-
tion, the ECS is not working properly.
If it comes on while driving, ECS is not
working properly.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
The ECS malfunction indicator may illu-
minate when the ESP indicator comes on
to indicate that the ESP is not working
properly, but it does not indicate malfunc-
tion of the ECS.
✽
NOTICE
If the battery is discharged or if you
push the SPORT button or the vehicle
height control button repeatedly in
short time, the ECS malfunction indica-
tor may illuminate to protect the system.
CAUTION
If the ECS malfunction indicator
illuminates when there is no air in
the suspension, the vehicle height
will be very lower, so do not drive to
protect the vehicle from the projec-
tions on the surface of the ground.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer by towing the vehi-
cle and have the system checked.
You should tow the vehicle as the
picture.
OVI059025N
OVI059024
531
Driving your vehicle
When you load the vehicle onto the tow
truck, the loading angle(1) should be
smaller than 6°.
OVI059026
Driving your vehicle
325
➀ CRUISE indicator
➁ SET indicator
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con-
stant speed without pressing the acceler-
ator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph)
and below approximately 180 km/h (113
mph).
✽
NOTICE
• During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activated
or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener-
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress the
brake pedal at least once after turning
the ignition switch to the ON position
or starting the engine. This is to check
if the brake switch which is important
part to cancel cruise control is in nor-
mal condition.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated)
the cruise control can be activat-
ed unintentionally. Keep the
cruise control system off
(CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in
use, to avoid inadvertently set-
ting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the vehicle at a constant speed,
for instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
• Be careful when driving downhill
using the cruise control system,
which may increase the vehicle
speed.
OVI059027
533
Driving your vehicle
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the CRUISE button on the steer-
ing wheel to turn the system on. The
CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 40 km/h (25 mph)
and less than 180 km/h (113 mph).
3. Push the SET- switch, and release it at
the desired speed. The SET indicator
light in the instrument cluster will illu-
minate. Release the accelerator pedal.
The desired speed will automatically
be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the RES
+
switch and hold it. Your
vehicle will accelerate. Release the
switch at the speed you want.
• Push the RES
+
switch and release it
immediately. The cruising speed will
increase by 2.0 km/h (1.2 mph) or 1.0
mph (1.6 km/h) each time the RES
+
switch is operated in this manner.
• You can set the speed to 180 km/h
(113 mph).
OVI053029 OVI053030OVI053028
Driving your vehicle
345
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the SET- switch and hold it. Your
vehicle will gradually slow down.
Release the switch at the speed you
want to maintain.
• Push the SET- switch and release it
immediately. The cruising speed will
decrease by 2.0 km/h (1.2 mph) or 1.0
mph (1.6 km/h) each time the SET-
switch is operated in this manner.
• You can set the speed to 40 km/h (25
mph).
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
If you press the SET- switch at increased
speed, the cruising speed will be set
again.
Cruise control will be canceled
when;
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Shifting the shift lever into N (Neutral).
• Pressing the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Decreasing the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 15 km/h (9
mph).
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 32 km/h (20 mph).
• Increasing the vehicle speed to more
than approximately 200 km/h (125
mph).
• The ESP is operating.
• Downshifting to the 2nd gear with
sports mode.
OVI053031OVI053029
535
Driving your vehicle
• Operate the EPB switch. Do not oper-
ate the parking brake while driving
except in an emergency situation.
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the SET indicator light
in the instrument cluster will go off), but it
will not turn the system off. If you wish to
resume cruise control operation, push
the RES+ switch located on your steering
wheel. You will return to your previously
preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 40 km/h
(25 mph):
If any method other than the CRUISE
switch was used to cancel cruising speed
and the system is still activated, the most
recent set speed will automatically
resume when the RES+ switch is
pushed.
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
40 km/h (25 mph).
✽
NOTICE
Always check the road conditions when
pressing the RES+ switch to resume the
speed.
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Push the CRUISE button (the CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument cluster
will go off).
• Turn the engine start/stop button off.
Both of these actions will cancel the
cruise control operation. If you want to
resume the cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
OVI053030 OVI053028
Driving your vehicle
365
➀ CRUISE indicator
➁ SET indicator
➂ Set speed
➃ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
The smart cruise control system allows
you to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed and distance detecting
the vehicle ahead without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
✽
NOTICE
• During normal smart cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after applying
the brakes, the smart cruise control
will energize after approximately 3
seconds. This delay is normal.
• To activate smart cruise control,
depress the brake pedal at least once
after turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine. This
is to check if the brake switch which is
important part to cancel smart cruise
control is in normal condition.
SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the smart cruise control is left
on, (CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated)
the smart cruise control can be
activated unintentionally. Keep
the smart cruise control system
off (CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the smart cruise control is
not in use, to avoid inadvertently
setting a speed.
• Use the smart cruise control sys-
tem only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the smart cruise con-
trol when it may not be safe to
keep the car at a constant speed,
for instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the smart cruise control
system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Be careful when driving downhill
using the smart cruise control
system, which may increase the
vehicle speed.
• The smart cruise control system
is not a substitute for safe driving
practices but a convenience
function only. It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to always
check the speed and distance to
the vehicle ahead.
OVI059054
537
Driving your vehicle
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the CRUISE button on the steer-
ing wheel to turn the system on. The
CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
The smart cruise control speed can be
set as follows:
• 30 km/h~180 km/h: when there is no
vehicle in front
• 10 km/h~180 km/h: when there is a
vehicle in front
3. Push the SET- switch, and release it at
the desired speed. The SET indicator
light, set speed and vehicle to vehicle
distance on the LCD screen will illumi-
nate. Release the accelerator pedal.
The desired speed will automatically
be maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the RES
+
switch and hold it. Your
vehicle set speed will increase by 10
km/h or 5 mph. Release the switch at
the speed you want.
• Push the RES
+
switch and release it
immediately. The cruising speed will
increase by 1.0 km/h (0.6 mph) or 1.0
mph (1.6 km/h) each time the RES
+
switch is operated in this manner.
• You can set the speed to 180 km/h
(113 mph).
OVI053028 OVI053029 OVI053030
Driving your vehicle
385
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the SET- switch and hold it. Your
vehicle set speed will decrease by 10
km/h or 5 mph. Release the switch at
the speed you want.
• Push the SET- switch and release it
immediately. The cruising speed will
decrease by 1.0 km/h (0.6 mph) or 1.0
mph (1.6 km/h) each time the SET-
switch is operated in this manner.
• You can set the speed to 30 km/h (18.6
mph).
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
If you press the SET- switch at an
increased speed, the cruising speed will
be set again.
✽
NOTICE
Be careful when accelerating temporar-
ily, because the speed is not regulated
automatically at this time even if there is
a vehicle in front of you.
Cruise control will be canceled
when;
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Shifting the shift lever into N (Neutral) or
R (Reverse).
• Pressing the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 30 km/h (18.6
mph).
• Operate the EPB switch (if equipped).
Do not operate the parking brake while
driving except in an emergency situa-
tion.
• The ESP or ABS is operating.
• Downshifting to the 2nd gear with
sports mode.
OVI053029 OVI053031
539
Driving your vehicle
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 10km/h (6.2mph)
as the vehicle in front of you.
• Accelerating the vehicle speed to more
than approximately 180km/h
(113mph).
• The ESP is turned off.
• The sensor or the cover is stained with
foreign matter.
Each of these actions will cancel smart
cruise control operation (the SET indica-
tor light, set speed and vehicle to vehicle
distance on the LCD screen will go out),
but it will not turn the system off. If you
wish to resume smart cruise control
operation, push the RES+ switch located
on your steering wheel. You will return to
your previously preset speed.
To resume cruise control set
speed:
If any method other than the CRUISE
switch was used to cancel cruising speed
and the system is still activated, the most
recent set speed will automatically
resume when the RES+ switch is
pushed. It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 10 km/h (6.2 mph) when
the sensor detects the vehicle ahead or if
the vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 30 km/h (18.6 mph) when
there is no vehicle in front of your vehicle.
✽
NOTICE
Always check the road conditions when
pressing the RES+ switch to resume the
speed.
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Push the CRUISE button (the CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument cluster
will go out).
• Turn the engine off.
Both of these actions cancel smart cruise
control operation. If you want to resume
smart cruise control operation, repeat
the steps provided in “To set cruise con-
trol speed” on the previous page.
CAUTION
If the sensor cover is dirty or
obstructed, the smart cruise control
operation will cancel automatically.
OVI053030 OVI053028
Driving your vehicle
405
To set vehicle to vehicle distance:
This system assists you can set the dis-
tance from the vehicle ahead and main-
tain the selected distance even if you did
not push the accelerator or the brake
pedal.
The vehicle to vehicle distance will auto-
matically activate when the smart cruise
control system is on.
Select the appropriate distance accord-
ing to road conditions and vehicle speed.
Each time the button is pressed, the vehi-
cle to vehicle distance changes as fol-
lows;
Distance 3 → Distance 2 → Distance 1
For example, if you drive at 80 km/h (50
mph), the distance maintain as follows;
Distance 3 - approximately 55 m
Distance 2 - approximately 40 m
Distance 1 - approximately 26 m
✽
NOTICE
The 'Distance 3' is always set when the
system is used for the first time after
starting the engine.
When the lane ahead is clear:
• The vehicle speed will maintain the set
speed.
OVI059033
→
OVI059055
Distance 3 Distance 2 Distance1
541
Driving your vehicle
When there is a vehicle ahead of you
in your lane:
• Your vehicle speed will slow down or
speed up to maintain the selected dis-
tance.
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your
vehicle will travel at a steady cruising
speed after accelerating to the select-
ed speed.
• The warning chime will sound and a
message will appear when the vehicle
speed decrease to less than 10 km/h
(6.2 mph) due to a vehicle ahead, and
the smart cruise control system will
automatically cancel.
• If the system is deactivated, you must
actively adjust the vehicle speed, as
well as the distance to the vehicle
ahead by depressing the accelerator or
brake pedal.
• Always check the road conditions. Do
not rely on the warning chime.
OVI059056 OVI059057L
CAUTION
• The warning chime sounds and
malfunction indicator blinks if it
is hard to maintain the selected
distance to the vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
actively adjust the vehicle speed,
as well as the distance to the
vehicle ahead by depressing the
accelerator or brake pedal.
• Even if the warning chime is not
activated, always pay attention to
the driving conditions to prevent
dangerous situations from occur-
ring.
Distance 3 Distance 2 Distance 1
Driving your vehicle
425
Sensor to detect distance to the
vehicle ahead
The sensor detects distance to the vehi-
cle ahead.
If the sensor is covered with dirt or other
foreign matter, the vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance control may not operate correctly.
Always keep the sensor clean.
Sensor malfunction indicator
If the sensor or cover is dirty or obscured
with foreign matter such as snow, the
indicator will illuminate. Clean the sensor
by using a soft cloth.
SCC (Smart cruise control) malfunc-
tion indicator
The warning light illuminates when the
vehicle to vehicle distance control sys-
tem is not functioning normally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
OVI059058 OVI049221 OVI049222
543
Driving your vehicle
Limitations of the system
The smart cruise control system may
have limits to its ability to detect distance
to the vehicle ahead due to road and traf-
fic conditions.
On curves
• On curves, the smart cruise control
system may not detect a moving vehi-
cle in your lane, and then your vehicle
could accelerate to the set speed. Also,
the vehicle speed will slow down when
the vehicle ahead is recognized sud-
denly.
• Select the appropriate set speed on
curves and apply the brakes or accel-
erator pedal if necessary.
• Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.
Apply the accelerator pedal and select
the appropriate set speed. Check to be
sure that the road conditions permit
safe operation of the smart cruise con-
trol.
OBH058030
OBH058029
CAUTION
• Do not install accessories around
the sensor and do not replace the
bumper by yourself. It may inter-
fere with the sensor performance.
• Always keep the sensor and
bumper clean.
• To prevent sensor cover damage
from occurring, wash the car with
a soft cloth.
• Do not damage the sensor or sen-
sor area by a strong impact. If the
sensor moves slightly off posi-
tion, the smart cruise control sys-
tem will not operate correctly.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Use only a genuine HYUNDAI
sensor cover for your vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
445
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving, the
smart cruise control system may not
detect a moving vehicle in your lane,
and cause your vehicle to accelerate to
the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed
will slow down when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed on
inclines and apply the brakes or accel-
erator pedal if necessary.
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your lane
from an adjacent lane cannot be rec-
ognized by the sensor until it is in the
sensor's detection range.
• The sensor may not detect immediate-
ly when a vehicle cuts in suddenly.
Always pay attention to the traffic, road
and driving conditions.
• If a vehicle which moves into your lane
is slower than your vehicle, your speed
may decrease to maintain the distance
to the vehicle ahead.
• If a vehicle which moves into your lane
is faster than your vehicle, your vehicle
will accelerate to the selected speed.
Vehicle recognition
Some vehicles ahead in your lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor as follows:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcycles or
bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-decel-
erating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile such as
trailers with no loads
OBH058046OBH058045OBH058053
545
Driving your vehicle
A vehicle ahead cannot be recognized
correctly by the sensor if any of following
occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing upwards
due to overloading in the trunk
- While the steering wheel is operating
- When driving to one side of the lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves
Apply the brakes or accelerator pedal if
necessary.
(Continued)
• The smart cruise control system
is not a substitute for safe driving
practices but a convenience
function only. It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to always
check the speed and the distance
to the vehicle ahead.
• Always be aware of the selected
speed and vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance.
• Always maintain sufficient brak-
ing distance and decelerate your
vehicle by applying the brakes if
necessary.
• As the smart cruise control sys-
tem may not recognize complex
driving situations, always pay
attention to driving conditions
and control your vehicle speed.
• For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
WARNING
• The vehicle cannot be stopped by
using the smart cruise control
system.
If an emergency stop is neces-
sary, you must apply the brakes.
• Keep a safe distance according
to road conditions and vehicle
speed. If the vehicle to vehicle
distance is too close during a
high-speed driving, it may cause
a serious collision.
• The smart cruise control system
can not recognize a stopped
vehicle, pedestrians or an
oncoming vehicle. Always look
ahead cautiously to prevent
unexpected and sudden situa-
tions from occurring.
• In front of you, vehicles moving
with a frequent lane change may
cause a delay in the system's
reaction or may cause the system
to react to a vehicle actually in an
adjacent lane. Always look ahead
cautiously to prevent unexpected
and sudden situations from
occurring.
(Continued)
CAUTION
The smart cruise control system
may not operate temporarily due to
electrical interference.
Driving your vehicle
465
This system detects the lane with the
sensor at the front windshield and warns
you when your vehicle leaves the lane.
To operate the LDWS, pull the switch or
press the switch with the engine
start/stop button in the ON position. The
indicator illuminates on the cluster. To
cancel the LDWS, pull the switch or
press the switch again.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI059012
OVI051013
WARNING
• The LDWS does not make the
vehicle change lanes. It is the dri-
ver's responsibility to always
check the road conditions.
• Do not turn the steering wheel
suddenly, when the LDWS warns
you that your vehicle is leaving
the lane.
• If the sensor can not detect the
lane or if the vehicle speed does
not exceed 60km/h, the LDWS
won't warn you even though vehi-
cle leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the
front windshield, the LDWS may
not work properly.
• Do not let water or any kind of liq-
uid come in contact with the
LDWS sensor.
• Do not remove the LDWS parts
and do not affect the sensor by a
strong impact.
• Do not put objects that reflect
light on the dash board.
• Always check the road conditions
because you may not hear the
warning chime because of audio,
and external conditions.
OVI051082
Type A Type B
547
Driving your vehicle
If your vehicle leaves the lane when the
LDWS is operating and vehicle speed
exceeds 60km/h, the warning operates
as follows:
1. Visual warning
If you leave the lane, the lane you leave
on the LCD display blinks yellow with 0.8
seconds of interval.
2. Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning sound
operates with 0.8 seconds of interval.
3. Accelerator pedal warning
(if equipped)
If you leave the lane, the accelerator
pedal warning (vibration) operates after
auditory warning.
4. Tactual warning (if equipped with pre-
safe seat belt)
If you leave the lane for about 3 seconds,
the pre-safe seat belt pulls with 3 sec-
onds of interval.
OVI051014
OVI051066
OVI051015 OVI059063
• When the sensor detects the lane line
• When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line
Driving your vehicle
485
Warning indicator
If the LDWS FAIL warning indicator
comes on, the LDWS is not working
properly. Take your vehicle to an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
The LDWS does not operate
when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal to
change lane.
But, when the hazard warning flasher
is operating, the LDWS operates nor-
mally.
• Operating the wiper switch with HI
mode due to heavy rain.
• Driving on the lane line.
✽
NOTICE
To change lane, operate the turn signal
switch then change the lane.
The LDWS may not warn you
even if the vehicle leaves the
lane, or may warn you even if the
vehicle does not leave the lane
when;
• The lane can't be visible due to snow,
rain, stain, a puddle or many other
things.
• The brightness of the outside changes
suddenly.
• Not turning on the headlight even at
night or in the tunnel.
• Difficult to distinguish the color of the
lane from the road.
• Driving on a steep grade or a curve.
• Light reflects from the water on the
road.
• The lens or windshield is stained with
foreign matter.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or heavy
snow.
• The surrounding of the inside rear view
mirror temperature is high due to a
direct ray of light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane line is damaged or indistinct.
• The shadow is on the lane line by a
median strip.
• There is a mark similar to a lane line.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead drives
hiding the lane line.
• The vehicle shakes heavily.
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane lines are cross-
ing complicatedly.
• Putting something on the dashboard.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construction.
• The lane line is more than two.
OVI059016L
549
Driving your vehicle
For your safety, the intelligent accelerator
pedal operates as follows:
• The accelerator pedal vibrates when
the lane departure warning system (if
equipped) detects the vehicle has
moved out of its lane.
• The reactive force of the accelerator
pedal increases when the fuel efficien-
cy is low.
The intelligent accelerator pedal function
is available for use in vehicles equipped
with lane departure warning system
(LDWS), vehicle stability management
(VSM) system or ECO driving mode.
The ECO-P (pedal) indicator light will illu-
minate when the ECO-P button is
pressed. If the fuel efficiency is low, the
reactive force of intelligent accelerator
pedal will be increased. It is allow to con-
trol over excess acceleration and you can
drive fuel efficiently to help you improve
fuel efficiency.
If you press the ECO-P button again, the
indicator light turns off and the intelligent
accelerator pedal is not operated in ECO
driving mode. The intelligent accelerator
pedal function is not activated in SPORT
mode either.
To deactivate the intelligent accelerator
pedal function in vehicles equipped with
lane departure warning system (LDWS)
or vehicle stability management (VSM)
system, turn off the VSM or LDWS func-
tion by using each button.
INTELLIGENT ACCELERATOR PEDAL (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI051080
CAUTION
Do not be surprised when the pedal
vibrates. It's not a malfunction but a
warning for your safety.
Driving your vehicle
505
VSM detects the distance from the vehi-
cle ahead with the sensor, to warn you
before collision and protect you in certain
hazardous situations.
• If the VSM senses the object ahead too
near the vehicle and if driver's operat-
ing of the brake pedal or the steering
wheel should be needed, the warning
light illuminates.
Immediately reduce your speed.
• If the VSM senses more dangerous,
the warning sound also operates and
the accelerator pedal/seat belt
vibrates. Immediately reduce your
speed.
VEHICLE STABILITY MANAGEMENT (VSM) (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
Always check the road conditions
to prevent danger even if the warn-
ing light does not illuminate, the
warning sound does not operate or
the accelerator pedal/seat belt does
not vibrate.
OVI051059 OVI059064L
551
Driving your vehicle
Brake operating
• If the VSM senses the collision, the
brake system comes to standard mode
to react promptly when the driver oper-
ates the brake pedal.
• If the driver releases the accelerator
after warning in hazardous situations,
the VSM automatically brakes the vehi-
cle gently.
• If the driver hits the brake to reduce
vehicle speed, the brake assistant sys-
tem operates to raise efficiency of
braking.
• If danger disappears, if the driver
depresses the accelerator or if the driv-
er releases the brake pedal, the brake
operating stop.
Seat belt operating
The seat belt tightens when the vehicle
senses a collision.
To cancel the VSM
• If you press the VSM OFF button, the
warning operating and brake operating
will cancel and the VSM OFF indicator
illuminates on the instrument cluster.
To turn on the VSM, press the VSM
OFF button again. The VSM OFF indi-
cator goes out.
• If you press the ESP OFF button to
turn off the ESP, the VSM will cancel,
too.
WARNING
The VSM does not stop the vehicle
completely and does not avoid col-
lision. Always look ahead cautious-
ly to prevent unexpected and sud-
den situations from occurring.
WARNING
The VSM operates according to the
distance from the vehicle ahead,
relative velocity and driver's opera-
tion of the brake or accelerator
pedal. Do not drive dangerously to
operate the VSM.
OVI051069
Driving your vehicle
525
Malfunction indicator
• The VSM OFF indicator will illuminate
when the engine start/stop button is
turned ON, but should go off after
approximately 3 seconds. If the indica-
tor does not come on, or continuously
remains on after coming on for about 3
seconds when you turn the engine
start/stop button to the ON position, or
if the indicator comes on while driving,
the VSM is not working properly. Take
your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
• The VSM OFF indicator may illuminate
when the ESP indicator or SCC indica-
tor comes on, but it does not indicate
malfunction of the VSM.
OVI059067
WARNING
The VSM is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the respon-
sibility of the driver to always check
the speed and the distance to the
vehicle ahead.
WARNING
• Even if there is a malfunction to
the brake operating of the VSM,
when you depress the brake
pedal, the brake is operating nor-
mally. But, the VSM brake operat-
ing does not operate even in cer-
tain hazardous situations.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 15 km/h (9.3
mph) and below approximately
180 km/h (111.8 mph).
• The VSM does not react to
- Persons or animals.
- Oncoming vehicles in the oppo-
site lane or the vehicle in the
intersection.
- Stopped objects.
• The VSM can not detect the
objects certainly, when:
- The sensors are stained with
dirt or covered.
- There is heavy rain or heavy
snow.
- There is interference by electro-
magnetic waves.
(Continued)
553
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
- There are strong radar reflec-
tions.
- Driving in curve.
- Driving uphill or downhill.
- Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
- The object ahead is very narrow
such as motorcycles or bicy-
cles.
- The vehicle cuts in suddenly.
• The VSM brake operating does
not operates, if the driver does
not release the accelerator pedal
or does not operate the brake
pedal.
Driving your vehicle
545
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
miles (kilometers) you can get from a gal-
lon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the fol-
lowing driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-
ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts
or full-throttle shifts and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to that of the other traffic so you
don't have to change speeds unneces-
sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
possible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you can
avoid unnecessary braking. This also
reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your car uses.
Driving at a moderate speed, especial-
ly on the highway, is one of the most
effective ways to reduce fuel consump-
tion.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can
increase fuel consumption and also
increase wear on these components.
In addition, driving with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal may cause the
brakes to overheat, which reduces
their effectiveness and may lead to
more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-
ment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your car in good condition. For
better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your car
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. If you drive your
car in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see section 7
for details).
• Keep your car clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the car. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel con-
sumption and also contribute to corro-
sion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel
economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-
ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too high
a gear resulting in the engine bucking.
If this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-
ed by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
555
Driving your vehicle
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operat-
ed by engine power so your fuel econ-
omy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-
dition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer perform scheduled
inspections and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off dur-
ing motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine run-
ning. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
Driving your vehicle
565
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
• Avoid sudden movements in braking or
steering.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your drive wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion. Do not race the engine, and spin
the wheels as little as possible. If you are
still stuck after a few tries, have the vehi-
cle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid
engine overheating and possible dam-
age to the transmission.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
OVI059043
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transmission, while driving on slip-
pery surfaces can cause an acci-
dent. The sudden change in tire
speed could cause the tires to skid.
Be careful when downshifting on
slippery surfaces.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transmission
damage or failure, and tire damage.
557
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
The ESP system should be turned OFF
prior to rocking the vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-
ners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 56 km/h (35
mph). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station-
ary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage
that may injure bystanders.
OVI059045
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
OVI059044L
Driving your vehicle
585
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and prop-
erly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more diffi-
cult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to read-
just to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-
pared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equip-
ment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-
ier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking oper-
ation returns.
OVI059046L
559
Driving your vehicle
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no high-
er than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are going
to drive before you begin driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire fail-
ure.
✽
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire infla-
tion pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
Always check tires for proper
inflation before driving. For prop-
er tire pressures, refer to “Tires
and wheels” in section 8.
• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-
cient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tires can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tire tread before driving your
car. For further information and
tread limits, refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 7.
OVI029001
Driving your vehicle
605
More severe weather conditions of winter
result in greater wear and other prob-
lems. To minimize winter driving problem,
you should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires or to
install tire chains on your tires. If snow
tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and han-
dling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake appli-
cations, and sharp turns are potentially
very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-
cations on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-
cient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
✽
NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all countries.
Check the country laws before fitting
tire chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehi-
cle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for max-
imum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regu-
lations for possible restrictions against
their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stan-
dard tires. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
OVI059049
561
Driving your vehicle
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by mount-
ing some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec-
ommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wire-
type chains with a thickness of less than
12 mm (0.47 in). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufactur-
ers warranty.
Install tire chains only on the rear tires.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tires. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufac-
turer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tire. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.5 to 1 km (0.3 to
0.6 miles) to ensure safe mount-
ing. Retighten or remount the
chains if they are loose.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if avail-
able. Always place the vehicle in P
(Park), apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before installing
snow chains.
OVI059051
Driving your vehicle
625
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-
cates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the bat-
tery and cables as described in section
7. The level of charge in your battery can
be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer or a service station.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and compo-
nents to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph)
or the chain manufacturer’s rec-
ommended speed limit, whichev-
er is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
563
Driving your vehicle
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the con-
tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types of
anti-freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-
ily while you put the gear shift lever in P
and block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and inter-
fere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the car to be sure the move-
ment of the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weath-
er, you should carry appropriate emer-
gency equipment. Some of the items you
may want to carry include tire chains, tow
straps or chains, flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a
window scraper, gloves, ground cloth,
coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Driving your vehicle
645
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, to keep your
loaded vehicle weight within its design
rating capability. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum return of
the vehicle design performance. Before
loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining
your vehicle's weight ratings, from the
vehicle's specifications and the certifica-
tion label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-
ment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the certification label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-
tification label located on the driver’s (or
front passenger’s) door sill.
Overloading
VEHICLE WEIGHT
WARNING - Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehi-
cle are on the certification label
attached to the driver's (or front
passenger’s) door. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an acci-
dent or damage the vehicle.You can
calculate the weight of your load by
weighing the items (and people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your
vehicle.
565
Driving your vehicle
E140000ABH
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
TRAILER TOWING
6
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2
If the engine will not start / 6-3
Emergency starting / 6-4
If the engine overheats / 6-6
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) / 6-7
If you have a flat tire / 6-12
Towing / 6-18
Emergency commodity / 6-24
What to do in an emergency
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehi-
cle is stopped near the edge of a road-
way.
Depress the flasher switch with the
engine start/stop button in any position.
The flasher switch is located in the cen-
ter console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehi-
cle is being towed.
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-
cle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the vehicle slow down while
driving straight ahead. Do not apply the
brakes immediately or attempt to pull
off the road as this may cause a loss of
control. When the vehicle has slowed
to such a speed that it is safe to do so,
brake carefully and pull off the road.
Drive off the road as far as possible
and park on a firm level ground. If you
are on a divided highway, do not park
in the median area between the two
traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the shift
lever in P.
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the vehicle that is away from
traffic.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
WHILE DRIVING
OVI049086
63
What to do in an emergency
4.When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this sec-
tion.
If engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. Be sure the shift lever is in N (Neutral)
or P (Park) and the emergency brake
is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the engine start/stop button in the
OFF position, check all connectors at
the ignition coils and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be discon-
nected or loose.
3. If the engine still does not start, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the vehicle to start it.
This could result in a collision or
cause other damage.
What to do in an emergency
46
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
✽
NOTICE
Your vehicle has a battery in the trunk
room, but when you jump start your
vehicle, use the jumper terminal in the
engine room.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting proce-
dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent techni-
cian or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not fol-
lowed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek qualified assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sul-
furic acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
OVI069002
65
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting procedure
✽
NOTICE
Your vehicle has a battery in the trunk
room, but when you jump start your
vehicle, use the jumper terminal in the
engine room.
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-
volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
jump start connector (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative ter-
minal of the booster battery (3), then
the other end to the negative terminal
of the jump start connector (4). Do not
connect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to con-
tact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic trans-
mission cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
CAUTION - Battery cables
If you jump start the discharged
battery in the trunk compartment,
do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative ter-
minal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged bat-
tery to overheat and crack, releas-
ing battery acid.
Connect the jumper cable from the
negative terminal of the booster
battery to a solid, stationary or
metallic point away from the dis-
charged battery.
What to do in an emergency
66
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, you experience a loss of power,
or hear loud pinging or knocking, the
engine is probably too hot. If this hap-
pens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P and set the
parking brake. If the air conditioning is
on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the vehicle or steam is coming out
from the hood, stop the engine. Do not
open the hood until the coolant has
stopped running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss of
engine coolant and no steam, leave
the engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is operat-
ing. If the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check for
coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air
conditioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining from
it when you stop).
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and call the
nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for assistance.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine tem-
perature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If over-
heating happens again, call an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
WARNING
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to be blown out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
67
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale
(2) TPMS Malfunction Indicator
(3) Low Tire Pressure Position
Telltale (if equipped)
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not oper-
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is provided by a separate
telltale, which displays the symbol
"TPMS" when illuminated. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intend-
ed. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly.
OVI059074L
OVI069003L
What to do in an emergency
86
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
✽
NOTICE
If the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure tell-
tale do not illuminate for 3 seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position or engine is run-
ning, or if they remain illuminated
after coming on for approximately 3
seconds, take your car to your near-
est authorized HYUNDAI dealer
and have the system checked.
Low tire pressure tell-
tale
Low tire pressure posi-
tion telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. The low
tire pressure position telltale (supple-
mental) will indicate which tire is sig-
nificantly under-inflated by illuminat-
ing the corresponding position on the
LCD screen (if equipped).
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel. If you cannot
reach a service station or if the tire
cannot hold the newly added air,
replace the low pressure tire with the
spare tire.
The Low Tire Pressure and Position
telltale will remain on until you have
the low pressure tire repaired and
replaced on the vehicle.
✽
NOTICE
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure sensor.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
69
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator
comes on and stays on when there is
a problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. The system is
able to correctly detect an under-
inflation warning at the same time as
system failure then it will illuminate
both the TPMS malfunction and the
low tire pressure telltale. If the Front
Left sensor fails, the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator illuminates, but if the
Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear Right
tire is under-inflated, the low tire
pressure and position telltales may
illuminate together with the TPMS
malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible to determine the cause
of the problem.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
TPMS
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if snow
chains are used or some sep-
arate electronic devices such
as notebook computer, mobile
charger, remote starter or nav-
igation etc., are used in the
vehicle. This can interfere with
normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
(Continued)
What to do in an emergency
106
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. Have the flat tire repaired
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible or replace the
flat tire with the spare tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring sensor.
When the low pressure tire is
replaced with the spare tire, the low
tire pressure and the low tire pres-
sure position telltales may extinguish
and the TPMS malfunction indicator
may illuminate after restarting and
within 20 minutes continuous driving.
The TPMS malfunction indicator may
remain on until the original tire
equipped with a tire monitoring sen-
sor is reinflated to the recommended
pressure and reinstalled on the vehi-
cle then driving for a few minutes.
Once the low pressure tire is re-
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure and installed on the vehicle, the
TPMS malfunction indicator and the
low tire pressure and position tell-
tales will extinguish within a few min-
utes of driving.
If the indicators are not extinguished
after a few minutes, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
NEVER use a puncture-repair-
ing agent to repair and/or inflate
a low pressure tire. The tire
sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensor. If used, you
will have to replace the tire pres-
sure sensor.
(Continued)
• If there is a failed tire sensor, it
is possible for TPMS to tem-
porarily learn a replacement
sensor when you drive closely
to another vehicle equipped
with TPMS too. In rare cases,
this may temporarily delay the
TPMS malfunction turning on.
611
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1.6km (1 mile) during that 3
hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
CAUTION
• Do not use any tire sealant if
your vehicle is equipped with
a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure sen-
sors.
• In order to correctly monitor
the tires with inflation, the 4
tire pressure monitoring sen-
sors should be exactly fitted
to each of the 4 driven wheel.
There should be no other sen-
sors in the vehicle include
spare tire, it may cause the
system couldn’t monitor the
tires with inflation correctly.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
What to do in an emergency
126
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment. Pull up the luggage
box cover to reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
OVI069004L
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jacking
support.
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death.
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
WARNING - Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
(Continued)
613
What to do in an emergency
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Place the shift lever into P (Park).
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
OVI069005
OVI069001L
CAUTION
When you remove or store the
spare tire, don't give a shock to
the battery.
Shock to the battery may cause
failure of electrical circuits.
What to do in an emergency
146
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
OVI069007
WARNING -
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in the vehicle that is
being jacked.
OVI069009
615
What to do in an emergency
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
OVI069010 OBH068012
What to do in an emergency
166
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels,
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
tighten the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)
WARNING
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that interferes with
the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mount-
ing surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
OVI069011
617
What to do in an emergency
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” sec-
tion 8.
What to do in an emergency
186
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial
tow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow-
ing procedures are necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel
dollies or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
front wheels on the ground (without dol-
lies) and the rear wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the rear
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the rear wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
rear of the vehicle should always be lift-
ed, not the front.
✽
NOTICE
When you tow the vehicle as the picture
(A), the cable should be secured to the
vehicle towing hook (1) as the picture.
If you use chains or cables to tie down
your vehicle, the angle (2) must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or
the vehicle may be damaged.
OVI069022L
OVI069012
A
B
C
dolly
619
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emer-
gency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the engine start/stop button in the
ACC position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
OVI069014
OVI069013
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground as this
may cause damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to place the shift lever in N
(Neutral) may cause internal dam-
age to the transmission.
CAUTION
If the ECS malfunction indicator
illuminates when there is no air in
the suspension, the vehicle height
will be very lower, so do not drive to
protect the vehicle from the projec-
tions on the surface of the ground.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer by towing the vehi-
cle and have the system checked.
You should tow the vehicle as the
picture.
OVI059025N
What to do in an emergency
206
When you load the vehicle onto the tow
truck, the loading angle(1) should be
smaller than 6°.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1. Open the trunk, and remove the tow-
ing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover by pressing the
lower part of the cover on the front and
the rear bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
OVI069016
OVI069017
OVI059026
Front
Rear
621
What to do in an emergency
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow
truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, power train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-
cle out of mud, sand or other condi-
tions from which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequent-
ly.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
OVI069018
OVI069019
Front
Rear
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
What to do in an emergency
226
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16
feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Place the engine start/stop button in
ACC so the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transmission shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per-
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and tow-
ing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle is unable
to be moved, do not forcibly con-
tinue the towing. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service for
assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
OVI069020
623
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION - Automatic
transmission
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transmission is in
neutral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed vehi-
cle to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transmission, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1 mile
) when towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transmission fluid leak
under your vehicle. If the auto-
matic transmission fluid is leak-
ing, a flatbed equipment or tow-
ing dolly must be used.
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
There are some emergency commodities
in the vehicle to help you respond to the
emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know how to
use the fire extinguisher, take the follow-
ing steps carefully.
1. Pull the pin at the top of the extin-
guisher that keeps the handle from
being accidentally pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle toward the base of the
fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft) away
from the fire and squeeze the handle
to discharge the extinguisher. If you
release the handle, the discharge will
stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth at the
base of the fire. After the fire appears
to be out, watch it carefully since it
may re-ignite.
First aid kit
There are some items such as scissors,
bandage and adhesive tape and etc. in
the kit to give first aid to an injured per-
son.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the road to
warn oncoming vehicles during emer-
gencies, such as when the vehicle is
parked by the roadside due to any prob-
lems.
Tire pressure gauge
(If equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-to-
day use, and you may have to add a few
pounds of air periodically and it is not
usually a sign of a leaking tire, but of nor-
mal wear. Always check tire pressure
when the tires are cold because tire pres-
sure increases with temperature.
To check the tire pressure, take the fol-
lowing steps;
1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap that is
located on the rim of the tire.
2. Press and hold the gauge against the
tire valve. Some air will escape as you
begin and more will escape if you don't
press the gauge in firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will activate
the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge to
know whether the tire pressure is low
or high.
5. Adjust the tire pressures to the speci-
fied pressure. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 8.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
624
What to do in an emergency
7
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-5
Owner maintenance / 7-6
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-8
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-15
Engine oil / 7-18
Engine coolant / 7-19
Brake fluid / 7-22
Power steering fluid / 7-23
Washer fluid / 7-24
Air cleaner / 7-25
Climate control air filter / 7-28
Wiper blades / 7-30
Battery / 7-33
Tires and wheels / 7-36
Fuses / 7-46
Light bulbs / 7-57
Appearance care / 7-67
Emission control system / 7-73
Maintenance
Maintenance
27
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Radiator cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filler cap
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Power steering fluid reservoir
10. Jump start connector
* The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
* The battery is in the trunk.
OBH018003/OBH011100
■
■
3.8 Engine
• MPI
• GDI
73
Maintenance
OVI079001
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Radiator cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filler cap
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Power steering fluid reservoir
10. Jump start connector
* The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
* The battery is in the trunk.
■
4.6 Engine
Maintenance
47
OBH011101
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Radiator cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filler cap
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Power steering fluid reservoir
10. Jumper terminal
* The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
* The battery is in the trunk.
■
5.0 Engine
75
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce-
dures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehi-
cle, we strongly recommend that you
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
perform this work.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has fac-
tory-trained technicians and genuine
HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality
service, see an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational prob-
lems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or person-
al injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages. You need
this information to establish your compli-
ance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle
maintained and repaired by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI’s high
service quality standards and receives
technical support from HYUNDAI in
order to provide you with a high level of
service satisfaction.
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, sev-
eral procedures can be done only by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special
tools.
✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warran-
ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-
rate Service Passport provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-
icing or maintenance procedure, have it
done by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
Maintenance
67
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer at the frequencies indicated to
help ensure safe, dependable operation
of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as
soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reser-
voir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while work-
ing under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (espe-
cially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose cloth-
ing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
77
Maintenance
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-
eling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hard-
to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the oper-
ation of your transmission occurs,
check the transmission fluid level.
• Check automatic transmission P (Park)
function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air condition-
ing system during or after use is nor-
mal).
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-
nals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with wash-
er fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
Maintenance
87
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic trans-
mission linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if
the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, fol-
low Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 32°C
(90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After 96 months or 120,000 km (80,000
miles) continue to follow the prescribed
maintenance intervals.
79
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
3
: Driving in summer season temperature over 40°C (104°F - SAUDI, UAE, OMAN, KUWAIT, BAHRAIN, QATAR, IRAN,YEMEN
ETC) or driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h) must conform the severe driving condition.
*
4
: If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bot-
tle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to
use them. Do not mix other additives.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Drive belts *
1
For Europe I I
Except Europe I I I I
Engine oil and
engine oil filter *
2
For Middle East
Replace every 10,000 km or 12 months *
3
Except Middle East R R R R R R R R
Add fuel additives *
4
For Europe Every 15,000 km or 12 months
Except Europe Every 5,000 km or 6 months
Air cleaner filter
For Middle East,
India
R R R R R R R R
Except Middle East,
India
I I R I I R I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
107
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
5
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
*
6
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should per-
form the operation.
*
7
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule
depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard start-
ing problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Spark plugs
Replace every 165,000 km (110,000 miles) or 120 months *
5
Valve clearance (3.8L) *
5
*
6
I
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap I I
Fuel tank air filter
For Europe I I
Except Europe I R I R
Vacuum hose I I I I I I I I
Fuel filter*
7
For Europe I I
Except Europe I R I R
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I
Cooling system
Inspect “Coolant level and leak” every day
Inspect “Water pump” when replacing the drive belt or timing belt
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
711
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
8
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
9
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Engine coolant *
8
For Europe
At first, replace at 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years:
after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months *
9
Except Europe
At first replace at 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years:
after that, replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months *
9
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
All electrical systems I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Brake pedal I I I I
Parking brake I I I I
Brake fluid
For Europe I R I R I R I R
Except Europe I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I
Power steering fluid and hoses I I I I I I I I
EHPS motor pump and hoses Inspect
every 20,000 km (12,000 miles)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
10
: Rear differential oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots
I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear)
I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints
I I I I I I I I
Bolt and nuts on chassis and body
I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped)
I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor (if equipped)
I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R R R R R R R R
Automatic transmission fulid No check, No service required
Exhaust system
I I I I
Rear differential oil *
10
I I
Propeller shaft
I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
713
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
For Middle East R Every 5,000 km or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
Except Middle East R
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles)
or 6 months
Air cleaner filter I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Spark plugs R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
A, B, H, I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Automatic transmission fluid
For Europe R Every 90,000 km
A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Except Europe R Every 100,000 km
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Maintenance
147
Parking brake I C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I C, D, E, F
Rear differential oil
R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, E, G, I, J
Propeller shaft I
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
C, E
Climate control air filter (if equipped) R C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5
miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles)
in freezing temperature
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads
H : Towing a trailer (if equipped)
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
715
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more fre-
quent oil and filter changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-
ration and replace if necessary.
Fuel filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an exces-
sive amount of foreign matter accumu-
lates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections for leakage and damage. Have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace
any damaged or leaking parts immedi-
ately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-
cate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat dam-
age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and cou-
plings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
Maintenance
167
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Valve clearance (3.8L)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should
perform the operation.
Cooling system
Check cooling system components, such
as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Automatic transmission fluid
Automatic transmission fluid should not
be checked under normal usage condi-
tions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid should
be changed at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer in accordance to the scheduled
maintenance at the beginning of this
chapter.
✽
NOTICE
Automatic transmission fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transmission fluid will begin to look
darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transmission mal-
function and failure.
Use only specified automatic trans-
mission fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
717
Maintenance
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage. Replace
any damaged or leaking parts immedi-
ately. Inspect the power steering belt (or
drive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks,
excessive wear, oiliness and proper ten-
sion. Replace or adjust it if necessary.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-
essary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
(if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and con-
nections for leakage and damage.
Brake discs, pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
For more information on checking the
pads or lining wear limit, refer to the
Hyundai web site.
(http://brakeman
ual.hmc.co.kr)
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Maintenance
187
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capaci-
ties” in section 8.)
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
OBH078002L
OBH078002N
3.8L
4.6L/5.0L
OBH078003L
OBH078003N
3.8L
4.6L/5.0L
CAUTION
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
• Do not spill engine oil, when adding
or changing engine oil. If you drop
the engine oil on the engine room,
wipe it off immediately.
719
Maintenance
Changing the engine oil and filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the begin-
ning of this section.
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-
tory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irrita-
tion or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory ani-
mals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
ENGINE COOLANT
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the radi-
ator cap while the engine is oper-
ating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage and could result in seri-
ous personal injury from escap-
ing hot coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
(Continued)
Maintenance
207
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-
rated hoses.
The coolant level should be
filled between F and L
marks on the side of the
coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water. Bring the level
to F, but do not overfill. If frequent addi-
tions are required, see an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling system
inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deion-
ized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improp-
er coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be pro-
tected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-
ing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-
lowing table.
OBH078004
WARNING
The electric motor (cool-
ing fan) is controlled by
engine coolant tempera-
ture, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed.
It may sometimes operate even
when the engine is not running.
Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blades. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the
electric motor will automatically
shut off. This is a normal condition.
If your vehicle is equipped with
GDI, the electric motor (cooling fan)
may operate until you disconnect
the negative battery cable.
(Continued)
• Even if the engine is not operat-
ing, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
721
Maintenance
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
OBH072005L
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pres-
sure causing serious injury.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such
as the generator.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
Maintenance
227
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-
odically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake fluid, clean the area around
the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent
brake fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition asso-
ciated with the wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, have
the brake system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants or capaci-
ties” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
WARNING - Loss of brake
fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to contact
the vehicle's body paint, as paint
damage will result. Brake fluid,
which has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should never
be used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be disposed
of properly. Don't put in the wrong
kind of fluid. A few drops of miner-
al-based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
OBH078006L
723
Maintenance
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking the power steering fluid
level
With the vehicle on level ground, check
the fluid level in the power steering reser-
voir periodically. The fluid should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the gauge at the normal tempera-
ture.
Before adding power steering fluid, thor-
oughly clean the area around the reser-
voir cap to prevent power steering fluid
contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level.
In the event the power steering system
requires frequent addition of fluid, the
vehicle should be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Use only the specified power steering
fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants
or capacities" in section 8.)
Checking the power steering
hose
Check the connections for oil leaks, dam-
age and twists in the power steering
hose before driving.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to the power
steering water pump unit, do not
operate the vehicle for prolonged
periods with a low power steering
fluid level.
• Never start the engine when the
reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful that
dirt does not get into the tank.
• Too little fluid can result in
increased steering effort and/or
noise from the power steering
system.
• The use of the non-specified fluid
could reduce the effectiveness of
the power steering system and
cause damage to it.
OBH078022
Maintenance
247
Checking the washer fluid level
The reservoir is translucent so that you
can check the level with a quick visual
inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available. However, use washer solvent
with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
WASHER FLUID
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contacting
windshield washer fluid. Serious
injury or death could occur.
OBH078008
725
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed air.
Main air cleaner
1. Push the top of the fastener to remove
the cover.
2. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
OBH078010L
OBH078010N
3.8L
4.6L/5.0L
OBH078011
OBH078011N
3.8L
4.6L/5.0L
OVI079117L
Maintenance
267
4. Replace the air cleaner filter.
5. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
Chamber air cleaner (if equipped)
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Replace the air cleaner filter after
pulling up the locking tab (1).
3. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
OBH078013
OBH071051 OVI072052
727
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage condi-
tions” in this section.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces-
sive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner fil-
ter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use
of non-genuine parts could dam-
age the air flow sensor.
• When you clean the filter, use the
compressed air and blow the air
from the clean side to the dirty
side.
Maintenance
287
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should be
replaced according to the Maintenance
Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in
severely air-polluted cities or on dusty
rough roads for a long period, it should
be inspected more frequently and
replaced earlier. When you replace the
climate control air filter, replace it per-
forming the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
Filter replacement
1. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers on both sides to allow the
glove box to hang freely on the hinges.
2. Remove the cylinder at the left of the
glove box.
OVI079015 OVI079016
729
Maintenance
3. Remove the climate control air filter
case pulling out both sides of the
cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽
NOTICE
When replacing the climate control air
filter, install it properly. Otherwise, the
system may produce noise and the effec-
tiveness of the filter may be reduced.
OBH078016 OBH078017
Maintenance
307
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the wind-
shield wipers. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-
ing properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean ade-
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
Front windshield wiper blade
For your convenience, move the wind-
shield wiper blades to the service posi-
tion as follows;
Turn the engine start/stop button off.
Move the wiper switch to the single wip-
ing (MIST/ ) position within 20 seconds
and hold the switch until the wiper blade
is in the fully up position.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
1JBA5122
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
OVI071041
731
Maintenance
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Open the cover of the blade. Press the
clip behind the wiper arm and remove
the blade assembly downward.
3. Install the new blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
4. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
6. Move the wiper switch to any position
and then to the OFF position.
OHM078059
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
OHM078060
OHG070043
Maintenance
327
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Turn the wiper blade clip. Then lift up
the blade clip.
3. Push the clip (1) and push up the
wiper arm (2).
4. Push down the wiper arm (3) and
install the new blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
OHM078059
OSBL071001
OSBL071003
OSBL071002
733
Maintenance
For best battery service
The battery is in the trunk.
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
BATTERY
OBH071018N
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If you feel a pain or a burn-
ing sensation, get medical
attention immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
(Continued)
Maintenance
347
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
Battery capacity label
1. CMF65L-BCI : The HYUNDAI model
name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity
(in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in
amperes by EN
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-
30A for two hours.
(Continued)
Failure to follow the above warn-
ings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
CAUTION
• When you don’t use the vehicle
for a long time in the low temper-
ature area, separate the battery
and keep it indoors.
The power trunk is not closed
completely when the battery is
separated. When you separate the
battery from the vehicle, refer to
"Power trunk" in section 4.
• Always charge the battery fully to
prevent the battery case dam-
aged in low temperature area.
• If you connect unauthorized elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the
battery may be discharged. Never
use unauthorized devices.
WARNING
Separating the battery from the
vehicle should be done in an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OJD072039
■ Example
735
Maintenance
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Power trunk (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
WARNING
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is discon-
nected.
• Operation related to the battery
should be done in an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
• Keep the battery away from water
or any liquid.
• The battery is in the trunk, so you
should be careful when you load
a container filled with liquid into
the trunk.
• For your safety, use the authentic-
ity by approved authorized
HYUNDAI dealer, when you
replace the battery.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the charg-
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
Maintenance
367
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire underin-
flation
Severe underinflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
OBH088004N
737
Maintenance
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (one
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Maintenance
387
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling, loss of vehi-
cle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pres-
sure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehi-
cle.
739
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽
NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
WARNING
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause unusu-
al handling characteristics that
could result in death, severe
injury, or property damage.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
CBGQ0706
S2BLA790A
Without a spare tire
With a full size spare tire
Maintenance
407
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
WARNING - Replacing
tires
To reduce the chance or serious
or fatal injuries from an acci-
dent caused by tire failure or
loss of vehicle control:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
too little or too much pressure
in your tires. This can lead to
uneven wear and tire failure.
• When replacing tires, never
mix radial and bias-ply tires
on the same car. You must
replace all tires (including the
spare) if moving from radial to
bias-ply tires.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Using tires and wheel other
than the recommended sizes
could cause unusual handling
characteristics and poor vehi-
cle control, resulting in a seri-
ous accident.
• Wheels that do not meet
HYUNDAI’s specifications
may fit poorly and result in
damage to the vehicle or
unusual handling and poor
vehicle control.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESP (Electronic Stability
Program) to work irregularly.
741
Maintenance
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road, to
reduce the possibility of losing con-
trol of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
Maintenance
427
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P245/50R18 100V
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
245 - Tire width in millimeters.
50 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
100 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
V - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.5JX18
7.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
743
Maintenance
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1612 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2012.
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an acci-
dent involving serious injury or
death.
Maintenance
447
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
745
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and sudden tire failure.
This can cause loss of vehicle
control and serious injury or
death.
Maintenance
467
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 4 fuse panels, one locat-
ed in the driver’s side panel bolster,
another is in the front passenger’s side
panel bolster, the others are in the
engine compartment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, discon-
nect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and fusible link for higher amperage rat-
ings.
✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse -
even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
OBH072060
Normal
Normal
Blade type
Cartridge type
Fusible link
Blown
Blown
Normal
Blown
747
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1. Turn the engine start/stop button to the
OFF position.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
front passenger’s side panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the pas-
senger compartment panel fuse panel
(or in the engine compartment fuse
panel).
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
OBH078021
OBH078019
OBH078020
Driver’s side
Front passenger’s side
Front passenger’s side
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips. The incomplete fas-
tening fuse or relay may cause
the vehicle wiring and electric
systems damage and a possible
fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and termi-
nals may be fastened incomplete-
ly, and it may cause a possible
fire. If fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, consult with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause con-
tact failure and system malfunc-
tion.
Maintenance
487
If the headlights or other electrical com-
ponents do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse panel in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with a memory
fuse to prevent battery discharge if your
vehicle is parked without being operated
for prolonged periods. Use the following
procedures before parking the vehicle for
prolonged periods.
1. Turn the engine start/stop button off.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and
pull up the memory fuse.
✽
NOTICE
• If the memory fuse is pulled up from
the fuse panel, the warning chime,
audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,
will not operate. Some items must be
reset after replacement. Refer to
“Battery” in this section.
• Even though the memory fuse is
pulled up, the battery can still be dis-
charged by operation of the head-
lights or other electrical devices.
OBH048020
749
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1. Turn the engine start/stop button and
all other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling up.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the front passen-
ger’s side panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Remove the fuse panel on the right
side in the engine compartment.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽
NOTICE
If the main fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse panel in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse panel cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water contact.
OBH078025
OBH078023L
OBH078024L
Maintenance
507
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Instrument panel fuse panel Engine compartment fuse panel
OBH071026/OBH071027/OBH078028L/OBH078029L
Driver’s side
Front passenger’s side
✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehi-
cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse panel in your
vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
751
Maintenance
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)
Description Fuse rating Protected component
P/WDW (RH) 30A Rear Power Window Module RH, Passenger Power Window Module
P/WDW (LH) 30A Rear Power Window Module LH, Driver Power Window Module
MODULE 3 10A
Steering Angle Sensor, Console Switch LH/RH, ECS Control Module, Pre-Safe Seat Belt LH/RH, Tire
Pressure Monitoring Module, Key Lock Unit
CRUISE SW 10A
Multifunction Switch (Remocon), Crash Pad Switch, A/C Control Module, Alternator, Instrument
Cluster, Rear Seat Warmer Module LH/RH, Rear CCS Control Module LH/RH, Driver/Passenger CCS
Control Module (With CCS), Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module (W/O CCS)
ESCL SW 10A FOB Holder, Start Stop Button Switch
CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster
INTELLIGENT
A/PEDAL
10A IAP ECU
KEY ILLUMINATION 10A Start Stop Button Switch, FOB Holder
P/DOOR (RL) 15A Rear Power Door Latch LH, Rear Door Window Curtain LH
IG KEY SUPPLY (IG1) 30A
E/R Junction Box (Fuse : EHPS 10A, ECU(IG1) 10A, TCU 15A, ESP 10A, STOP LP 10A, AFLS 10A,
INHIBITOR SW 10A, CRUISE 10A, INJECTOR DRIVE BOX 10A)
DR LOCK DRV 10A Driver Door Module
P/DOOR DRV 15A Front Door Mood Lamp LH, Driver Power Seat Switch, Driver Power Door Latch
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster (A/Bag IND.)
AFLS 10A
Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Sensor (W/O AFLS), Adaptive Front Lighting Module (With AFLS),
Head Lamp LH/RH
PDM1 10A PDM
RDM 10A Data Link Connector, Rear Smart Outside Handle LH/RH, Rear Door Module LH/RH
SHIFT LOCK 10A SPORT Mode Switch
Maintenance
527
Description Fuse rating Protected component
MODULE 2 10A
Multifunction Switch, Tilt & Telescopic Module, Driver/Passenger Door Module, Power Trunk Lid
Control Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, LDWS Camera, Front & Rear Parking Assist Control Module,
EPB Control Module, Driver/Passenger IMS Control Module, E/R Junction Box (FAM)
MODULE 1 10A
Multifunction Switch, Instrument Cluster (IND.), Power Trunk Lid Control Module, Driver/Passenger
Door Module, Rear Curtain Module, E/R Junction Box (FAM), Front Smart Outside Handle LH/RH,
Passenger IMS Control Module
P/HANDLE 15A Tilt & Telescopic Module
ECS 15A ECS Control Module
A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module
AUDIO(B+) 15A Audio, Front/Rear Monitor, AV Head Module, Rear Audio Switch, Media Module, Tunner Unit, MTS Unit
S/HEATER DRV 15A Driver CCS Control Module (With CCS), Driver Seat Warmer Module (With CCS)
P/TRUNK 30A Power Trunk Lid Control Module
F/LID 10A Fuel Filler Switch
AUDIO (IG1) 10A AV Head Module, Audio, Active Headrest Sensor Module, Camera Module, MTS Unit
A/CON (B+) 10A Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, A/C Control Module, Analog Clock
I.O.D 30A Fuse : A/CON (B+) 10A, AUDIO (B+) 15A, MODULE 1 10A
S/HEATER RL 15A Rear CCS Control Module LH (With CCS), Rear Seat Warmer Module LH (W/O CCS)
DR LOCK PASS 15A Passenger Door Module
PDM 2 10A IPM,PDM
A/CON (IG1) 10A A/C Control Module
RF RECEIVER 10A Auto Light Sensor & Security Indicator, RF Receiver
753
Maintenance
Instrument panel (Passanger’s side fuse panel)
Description Fuse rating Protected component
P/DOOR PASS 15A Passenger Power Door Latch, Passenser Power Seat Switch
PDM 25A PDM
ICE BOX 15A Rear Console Switch, Cool Box
HTD STRG 15A Steering Wheel Heated
S/HEATER PASS 15A Passenger CCS Control Module (With CCS), Passenger Seat Warmer Module (W/O CCS)
AUDIO (ACC) 10A
Camera Module, Rear Audio Switch, Audio, Front Monitor, Media Module, AV Head Module, MTS Unit,
RR MTS MIC
P/DOOR (RR) 15A Rear Power Door Latch RH, Rear Door Window Curtain RH
P/OUTLET (FR) 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Front Power Outlet Relay), Front Room Lamp, Center Facia Switch
MODULE 2 10A Overhead Console Assembly (Sunroof Motor), Rain Sensor, Rear Curtain Module
P/SEAT PASS 1 20A Passenger IMS Control Module (With IMS), Passenger Power Seat Relay Box (W/O IMS)
S/ROOF 20A Overhead Console Assembly (Sunroof Motor)
MODULE 3 10A A/C Control Module, IPM, PDM, Key Lock Unit
P/OUTLET(RR) 15A Rear Accessory Socket
P/SEAT(RR) 20A Rear Power Seat Relay Box LH
MODULE 1 10A
Instrument Cluster (MICOM), Rheostat, Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module, Passenger Receiver,
Rear CCS Control Module LH/RH, PDM, IPM
A/CON(IG2) 10A
Active Incar Sensor, Ionizer, A/C Control Module, Rear Console Switch, Console Vent Temperature
Actuator & Switch
IG KEY SUPPLY 30A E/R Junction Box (Fuse : AQS 10A, WASHER 15A)
S/HEATER RR 15A Rear CCS Control Module RH (With CCS), Rear Seat Warmer Module RH (W/O CCS)
CONSOLE SW 10A Console Switch LH/RH, Massage Module, Vibrator Module
MIRROR 10A Outside Mirror LH/RH
LEG SUPPORT (RR) 15A Rear Power Seat Relay Box RH
RR CURTAIN MTR 10A Rear Curtain Module
Maintenance
547
Engine compartment fuse panel
Description Fuse rating Protected component
ALT 200A Alternator
I/P LH PWR 60A I/P Junction Box LH
I/P RH PWR 60A I/P Junction Box RH
COOLING FAN 60A Cooling Fan Relay
EHPS 80A EHPS Module
AIR ECS 40A ECS Compressor Relay
AMP-1 40A AV JBL AMP
AMP-2 30A AMP
PDM (ACC) 30A PDM (ACC) Relay
VDC/ESC1 30A VDC/ESP Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
VDC/ESC2 30A VDC/ESP Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
PDM (IGN1) 30A PDM (IGN1) Relay
PDM (IGN2) 30A PDM (IGN2) Relay
P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver Power Seat Relay Box, IMS Control Module, Driver Lumbar Support Switch
H/LP WASHER 20A Head Lamp Washer Relay
VACUUM PUMP 20A Brake Vacuum Pump Relay
P/OUTLET (FRT) 25A ACC Socket Relay
TRUNK 10A Trunk Lid Relay
IMS 10A -
STOP LP 10A Stop Lamp Relay, Stop Lamp Switch, IPM
B/UP LP 10A Rear Combination Lamp LH/RH (IN), Electro Chromic Mirror, Camera Module, Rear Curtain Module
755
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
ECU 30A Engine Control Relay
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
IGN SW 2
(PRESAFETY PASS)
40A Ignition Switch (IG 2, START), Presafety Seat Belt Passenger
RR HTD 40A E/R Junction Box Fuse (AQS 10A, WASHER 15A)
IGN SW 1
(PRESAFETY DRV)
40A Ignition Switch (IG 1, ACC), Presafety Seat Belt Driver
A/CON 10A A/C Control Module
EPB 1 15A Electric Parking Brake Module
EPB 2 15A Electric Parking Brake Module
HORN 15A Horn Relay
IPM 10A IPM, Head Lamp (Low) Relay
AQS 10A AQS Sensor, Electronic Control Wiper Module, Blower Relay
DEICER 15A Heated Glass (FR) Relay
WASHER 15A Washer Relay
WIPER 30A Wiper Motor
HTD MIRR 10A A/C Control Module, Power Outside Mirror & Mirror Folding Motor LH/RH
TCU 15A TCM
AFLS 10A Head Lamp LH/RH
EHPS 10A EHPS Module
VDC/ESC 10A ESP Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ECU(IG1) 10A ECM
IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1,2,3,4,5,6
INJECTOR(B+) 15A Injector Drive Box
Maintenance
567
Description Fuse rating Protected component
SENSOR 1 10A ECM, Mass Air Flow Sensor, Oxygen Sensor #1,2,3,4
SENSOR 2 10A
Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Manifold Valve, Oil Control Valve, ECM,
Cooling Fan Relay, Immobilizer Module, Fuel Pump Resister
SENSOR 3 10A ECM, Injector #1~#6, Fuel Pump Relay
H/LP RH 15A Head Lamp RH
H/LP LH 15A Head Lamp LH
INJECTOR(IG1) 10A Injector Drive Box
CRUSIE 10A Smart Cruise Control Module
STOP LP 10A Stop Lamp Switch, Stop Lamp Relay, Generator,Vacuum Sw
ECU(B+) 15A ECM,TCM,Injector Drive Box
ROOM LP 10A Room Lamp Relay
F/PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay
START 30A Start Solenoid
757
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽
NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused by
the temperature difference between the
lamp inside and outside. This is similar
to the condensation on your windows
inside your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Headlight, position light, turn sig-
nal light, front fog light bulb
replacement
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Position light
(4) Front turn signal light
(5) Front fog light (if equipped)
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the LOCK position and turn off the
lights to avoid sudden movement
of the vehicle and burning your fin-
gers or receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer. In many cases, it is difficult
to replace vehicle light bulbs
because other parts of the vehicle
must be removed before you can
get to the bulb. This is especially
true if you have to remove the head-
light assembly to
get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing
the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
OVI079030
OVI070045
Type A
Type B
Maintenance
587
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Push the top of the fastener to remove
the cover.
4. Remove the cover.
5. Pull out the cover.
6. Insert the driver into the hold (1) and
lift up the driver while pull out the cover
(2).
7. Remove the fastener and screw under
the wheel arch.
OVI079100L OVI079102L
OVI079113L
OVI079114L
759
Maintenance
8. Pull out the bumper.
9. Remove 4 fasteners on the grille and
the bolt.
10. Remove the front bumper.
11. Be careful not to break up the clips
on the inside of the front bumper.
OVI079103L OVI079106L
OVI079104L
OVI079105L
Maintenance
607
12. If you want to replace the right side
head lamp, remove the bolts then
remove the air cleaner.
13. Remove the mounting bolts.
14. Pull the headlight assembly out to the
front of the vehicle.
15. Remove the clips.
16. Disconnect the power connector(s)
from the back of the headlight
assembly.
OVI079107L
OVI079108L
OVI079109L
OVI079110L
761
Maintenance
Headlight (HID/LED type) bulb
replacement
If the light bulb is not operating, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
HID/LED lamps have superior per-
formance vs. halogen bulbs. HID/LED
lamps are estimated by the manufactur-
er to last twice as long or longer than
halogen bulbs depending on their fre-
quency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point in the
life of the vehicle. Cycling the head-
lamps on and off more than typical use
will shorten HID/LED lamps life. HID/
LED lamps do not fail in the same man-
ner as halogen incandescent lamps. If a
headlamp goes out after a period of
operation but will immediately relight
when the headlamp switch is cycled it is
likely the HID/LED lamp needs to be
replaced. HID/LED lighting compo-
nents are more complex than conven-
tional halogen bulbs thus have higher
replacement cost.
Headlight bulb (High)
OHD076046
WARNING -
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-
ized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands.
Residual oil may cause the bulb
to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
(Continued)
WARNING -
HID/LED Headlight low
beam (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON bulb/
LED) due to electric shock danger.
If the low beam (XENON bulb/LED)
is not working, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Maintenance
627
17. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counter clockwise.
18. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket
connector.
19. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining
wire by depressing the end and push-
ing it upward.
20. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
21. Install a new headlight bulb and snap
the headlight bulb retaining wire into
position by aligning the wire with the
groove on the bulb.
22. Connect the headlight bulb socket
connector.
23. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
24. Connect the power connector(s) to
the back of the headlight assembly.
25. Reinstall the headlight assembly to
the body of the vehicle.
✽
NOTICE
If the headlight aiming adjustment is
necessary after the headlight assembly is
reinstalled, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OVI079111L
(Continued)
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
CAUTION
If the headlight (Low) is not operat-
ing, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
763
Maintenance
Traffic Change (For Europe)
The low beam light distribution is asym-
metric.
If you go abroad to a country with oppo-
site traffic direction, this asymmetric part
will dazzle oncoming car driver. To pre-
vent dazzle, ECE regulation demand
several technical solutions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive sheet, down
aiming). This headlamps are designed
not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you
need not change your headlamps in a
country with opposite traffic direction.
Turn signal light - bulb type
17. Remove the socket from the assem-
bly by turning the socket counter
clockwise until the tabs on the socket
align with the slots on the assembly.
18. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it until the
tabs on the bulb align with the slots in
the socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
19. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
20. Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly. Push
the socket into the assembly and turn
the socket clockwise.
✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is equipped with the LED
type, replace the turn signal light at the
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Position light
If the light bulb is not operating, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OVI079112L
Maintenance
647
Front fog light bulb replacement
1. Remove the front bumper under cover
and reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.
2. Disconnect the power connector from
the socket.
3. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket counter
clockwise until the tabs on the socket
align with the slots on the housing.
4. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing and
turn the socket clockwise.
5. Connect the power connector to the
socket.
6. Reinstall the front bumper under cover.
Side repeater light bulb replace-
ment (if equipped)
If the light bulb is not operating, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Rear fog light (if equipped)
OVI079116L
OVI079115L
OVI079031
765
Maintenance
Rear Back-up light
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the service cover by pulling out
the service cover.
3. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
Turn signal, stop and tail light, rear
fog light (if equipped)
If the light is not operating, have the vehi-
cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
High mounted stop light
replacement
If the light is not operating, have the vehi-
cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OVI079035
OVI079033
OVI079034
Maintenance
667
License plate light bulb replace-
ment
If the light is not operating, have the vehi-
cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
5. If the map lamp and room lamp are not
operating, have the vehicle checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OVI079037
OVI079038
Glove box lamp
Luggage lamp (if equipped)
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
OVI079039
767
Maintenance
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-
ing, you should wash it after each off-
road trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
APPEARANCE CARE
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits or engine
and related part located in the
engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components and
air duct inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
OJB037800
Maintenance
687
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preserva-
tive. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
769
Maintenance
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may col-
lect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on the underbody parts such as
the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system, even though they have
been treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes
that should not clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rusting.
Aluminum or chrome wheel mainte-
nance
The aluminum or chrome wheels are
coated with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum or chrome
wheels. They may scratch or damage
the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-
gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps pre-
vent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid deter-
gent. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum or chrome wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
Maintenance
707
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corro-
sion, we produces cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unpro-
tected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly impor-
tant. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when tempera-
tures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by mois-
ture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dis-
persed. For all these reasons, it is par-
ticularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
771
Maintenance
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from get-
ting started by observing the following:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the compo-
nents under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accu-
mulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly effec-
tive in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favor-
able environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of cor-
rosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-
ly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possi-
ble.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
Maintenance
727
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos-
metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and
air freshener from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause damage
or discoloration. If they do contact the
interior parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions for the proper way to
clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-
bing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-
tions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-
cle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components
inside the vehicle as this may dam-
age them.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the sur-
face may get stripped off.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
773
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty infor-
mation contained in the Service Passport
in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-
sion control system to meet all applicable
emission regulations.
There are three emission control sys-
tems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is rec-
ommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in this manu-
al.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Program (ESP) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-
ing during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) system off by press-
ing the ESP switch.
• After dynamometer testing is com-
pleted, turn the ESP system back on
by pressing the ESP switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase.This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
Maintenance
747
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con-
trolled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-
ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-
es so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms-
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
• This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or dura-
bility and may even violate governmen-
tal safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifica-
tion may not be covered under warran-
ty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, bat-
tery discharge and fire. For your safety,
do not use unauthorized electronic
devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions (car-
bon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever sus-
pect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain car-
bon monoxide (CO). Though color-
less and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions on this
page to avoid CO poisoning.
775
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements"
suggested in section 1.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-
formance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control sys-
tem. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.
If you run out of gasoline, it could
cause the engine to misfire and result
in excessive loading of the catalytic
converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi-
cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as grass, vegeta-
tion, paper, leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot while the
engine is running or immediately
after the engine is turned off. Keep
away from the exhaust system
and catalytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for cor-
rosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
8
Dimensions / 8-2
Bulb wattage / 8-2
Tires and wheels / 8-3
Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-4
Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-6
Vehicle certification label / 8-6
Tire specification and pressure label / 8-7
Engine number / 8-7
Air conditioner compressor label / 8-8
Specifications & Consumer information
Specifications & Consumer information
28
DIMENSIONS BULB WATTAGE
* : if equipped
*
1
: with air suspension
Item mm (in)
Overall length 5,160 (203.1)
Overall width 1,890 (74.4)
Overall height 1,495 (58.8)/ 1,490 (58.6)*
1
Wheelbase 3,045 (119.9)
Front tread 1,616 (63.6)
Rear tread 1,633 (64.29)
Light Bulb Wattage
Headlights (Low) 35 (HID) or LED
Headlights (High) 55
Front turn signal lights 21 or LED
Position lights LED
Side repeater lights* LED
Front fog lights* 35
Welcome light* LED
Rear fog light* LED
Stop and tail lights LED
Tail light LED
Rear turn signal lights 21 or LED
Back-up lights 16
High mounted stop light* LED
License plate lights LED
Map lamps LED
Room lamps LED
Luggage lamp 5
Glove box lamp 5
Vanity mirror lamps* LED
Door courtesy lamps* 5
83
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
* Normal load : Up to 3 persons
Item Tire size Wheel size
Inflation pressure bar (psi, kPa)
Wheel lug nut
torque kg•m
(lb•ft, N•m)
Normal load * Maximum load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire 245/50R18 7.5J×18
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
Specifications & Consumer information
48
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
3.8L
5.7 l (6.02 US qt.)
API Service SM *
3
,
ILSAC GF-4 or above,
ACEA A5
4.6L
6.5 l (6.87 US qt.)
5.0L
Orange Engine Oil Dipstick
6.8 l (7.19 US qt.)
Red Engine Oil Dipstick
7.2 l (7.61 US qt.)
Engine oil consumption
Normal driving condition
MAX. 1 l /1500 km
-
Severe driving condition
MAX. 1 l /1000 km
-
Automatic transmission fluid
10.1 l (10.67 US qt.)
GS ATF SP-IV-RR,
HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV-RR
Power steering
0.9 l (0.95 US qt.)
Pentosin CHF 202
Coolant
3.8L
10.1 l (10.67 US qt.)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for
aluminum radiator)
4.6L
13.5 l (14.26 US qt.)
5.0L
12.1 l (12.79 US qt.)
Brake fluid
0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt.)
SAE J1703, FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Rear differential oil
1.4 l (1.48 US qt.)
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X Equivalent)
Fuel
77 l (20.34 US gal.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
*
1
: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
: Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-
omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure
in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
: If the API service SM or ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL or ACEA A3.
85
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for sat-
isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those rec-
ommended could result in engine dam-
age.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operat-
ed in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from
the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
*
1
. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-
30 (API SM/ILSAC GF-4/ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil is not available in your coun-
try, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-20*
2
, 5W-30
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-30
3.8L(MPI)/4.6L(MPI)/5.0L(GDI)
3.8L(GDI)
*
1
. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-
20*
2
(API SM/ILSAC GF-4/ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil is not available in your coun-
try, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*
2
. In Middle East, do not use the engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 5W-20.
Specifications & Consumer information
68
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your car
and in all legal matters pertaining to its
ownership, etc.
The number is punched on floor under
the passenger’s seat.
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side
center pillar gives the vehicle identifica-
tion number (VIN).
OBH088001
OBH088005N
VIN label (if equipped)
Frame number
OVI089002
87
Specifications & Consumer information
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best perform-
ance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar gives the tire pressures rec-
ommended for your car.
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
4.6L (MPI)
3.8L (MPI)
OBH088004N
ENGINE NUMBER
5.0L (GDI)
3.8L (GDI)
OBH088003L/OBH088007N/OBH081003/OBH081010
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.
Specifications & Consumer information
88
A compressor label informs you the type
of compressor your vehicle is equipped
with such as model, supplier part num-
ber, production number, refrigerant (1)
and refrigerant oil (2).
AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR LABEL
OHC081001
